JP7029073B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a bullet game machine having a game area in which a game ball is launched.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols changed in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the substantially center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when the combination of symbols when the movement of symbols in multiple rows is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed, but also the variable display time is usually set in a state where one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is obtained, as in the so-called reach screen. It is designed to raise the expectations of the player, such as making it longer than the original. In addition, the player's expectation is raised by the effect of using characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display and the advance notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-73872

It is known that a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of symbol fluctuations have been executed in a pseudo manner by performing a re-variation display after the fluctuation of a decorative symbol or the like is temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol fluctuation. (See, for example, Patent Document 2). While such pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects are becoming constant among various gaming machine models, it is required to realize pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects that are even more interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine using a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect that enhances the interest.

In order to solve the above problems, the ball game machine of a certain aspect of the present invention is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed and a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of the game ball triggers a lottery. The winning / failing judgment is executed based on the lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from the normal game to the special game which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by the start winning opening and the entry into the starting winning opening. The hit / fail determination means, the symbol display device for displaying the result of the hit / fail judgment in a variable manner, the symbol determination means for determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the variation of the symbol. A variation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which the display process is defined by lottery, a special game control means for executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and a hit / fail judgment. It is determined by an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result are variablely displayed, an effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variable pattern, and an effect determining means. It is provided with an effect display control means for displaying the effect contents on the effect display device. As the content of the effect, the effect determining means makes it appear that a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol change, and then the re-variation display is performed so that the pattern change is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation effect is displayed, and the effect display control means suggests that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the temporary stop display of a plurality of decorative symbols. When the notice of is displayed, the pseudo continuous variation effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the notice is not displayed, and when an additional image different from a plurality of decorative symbols is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the pseudo continuous variation is displayed. The expectation that the effect following the effect will result in a big hit is higher than when the additional image is not displayed.

Another aspect of the present invention is also a ball game machine. This ball game machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, a start winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and a start winning opening that triggers a lottery when the game ball enters, and a starting winning opening. As an opportunity, a winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and for showing the result of the winning / failing determination. From the symbol display device in which the symbol is variablely displayed, the symbol determination means for determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the plurality of types of variable patterns in which the symbol variation display process is defined. A variable pattern determining means for selecting whether or not to win by lottery, a special game control means for executing a special game when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit, and a plurality of decorative symbols for producing the result of the winning / failing determination are displayed in a variable manner. The effect display device, the effect determination means for determining the effect content including the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern, and the effect display control for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device. Means and. As the effect content, the effect determining means temporarily stops and displays a special symbol different from a plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol change, and then performs a re-variation display to perform pseudo multiple symbol changes in a pseudo manner. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed, and the effect display control means performs the pseudo-continuous variation effect before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. When a notice of the suggested content is displayed, the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the notice is not displayed, and when an additional image different from the special symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous change effect, the pseudo continuous effect is displayed. The degree of expectation that the effect following the variable effect indicates a big hit is higher than the case where the additional image is not displayed.

It should be noted that any combination of the above components, and those in which the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media containing computer programs, data structures, and the like are also used. , Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that uses a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect that enhances the interest.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows the hit / fail determination table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. It is a figure which shows schematically the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail determination table referred to in the advance hit / fail judgment. It is a figure which shows schematically the advance hit / fail judgment table corresponding to a game setting. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the mobile cooperation system schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of a main board and a sub board schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of an effect control device schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process of a sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for various device control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows typically the screen example when the button image appears on the screen in the button effect. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process in an example of a button production. It is a figure of the table which shows a plurality of kinds of effect patterns which the combination of the type of the button image to display in a button effect is defined. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the 1st button effect in 2nd Example. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the 2nd button effect in 2nd Example. It is a time chart which shows typically the effect process in one example of the button effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button effect in 3rd Example. It is a time chart which shows typically the effect process in one example of the button effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button effect in 4th Example. It is a time chart which shows typically the effect process in one example of the button effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button timer effect in the 1st special effect pattern of 5th Example. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button timer effect in the 2nd special effect pattern of 5th Example. It is a time chart which shows typically the effect process in the example of the button timer effect based on the 1st special effect pattern. It is a figure which shows schematically the notice scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows typically the determination table of the display timing of a button timer. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button notice effect in the 6th Example. 6 is a time chart schematically showing an effect process in the button notice effect of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen example of the button notice effect in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen example of the button notice effect in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the production process in the special production of the 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the 8th embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the button effect of the modification. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the special effect in 9th Example. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the 9th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the 9th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the 9th embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the special effect in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the scenario of a special production. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the eleventh embodiment. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the special production of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 1st step of a pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 2nd step of the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 3rd step of a pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for deciding the mode of the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the surface transition example schematically. It is a figure which shows the display example of the button effect of 13th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows typically the production process of the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Further, in order to achieve both of these playability, a plurality of start winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of hold lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games constituting a special game when a big hit occurs (opening time of the big winning opening). A long open unit game and a short open unit game with a short open time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is a longer open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game, such as (including the case where the number of games is large). On top of that, at first, aim for the first hit in the first game, and after the big hit in the first game gives a time reduction, aim for the second game repeatedly and get a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, and a cross key 110. Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening portion and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin members constituting the appearance of the door 104 are translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning opening 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by a rail 82. , Out port 34, effect display device 60, center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over substantially the central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and is a flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed at the lower part of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction of entering the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 depending on the rolling method. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. At the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs an effect is provided. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, "winning ball", "winning prize", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning opening and each entry opening may be composed of a type of "passing opening" (also referred to as "gate" or "through chucker") through which a game ball passes, and "entry ball". "Winning," "falling in," and "passing" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that the ball can be aimed at one side depending on the launch strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at a substantially lower center in the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handed. That is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter the second starting port 12 or is easy to enter, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, the second starting port is not opened unless the expanding mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball at 12. The winning / failing lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is executed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. To.

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to strike a target depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aimed at one to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is left-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively weakly. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is hit right-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively strongly.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81, and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81, and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an open lottery to determine whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32, the normal symbol, which is a symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called "ordinary symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operating ports may be one, and the game area 81 may be provided at the left side position.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20, and generates large prize opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that is opened as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined mode. The large winning opening 20 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the out opening 34. As a modification, another large winning opening may be provided at the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is an outlet for discharging a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings, and is provided with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the outside of the game area 81 in the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, and a normal diagram. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol Changes in 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and is a special game when the game is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are, for example, an eight-segment LED composed of eight segments of seven segments forming a "figure 8" and one segment representing a "dot". It is a display device of. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value for 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by the combination of segments do not necessarily form the body of letters or numbers, and may be symbols having no meaning in general formed by the combination of each segment. .. These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights are turned off) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 use LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second are used depending on the combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a directing role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the game area 81 are used. The display unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing the special symbol without using a decorative symbol by giving it a directing role, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to make it.

A first special symbol hold display unit 71 is provided above the first special symbol display unit 41 as a hold lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided above the second special symbol display unit 42. A second special symbol hold display unit 72 is provided as a hold lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the game of. The first special figure reservation display unit 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the winning / failing lottery values held in the first game depending on the number of lighting or the number of blinking lamps (hereinafter, the number of holdings of the winning / failing lottery value). Simply display (also referred to as "pending number"). The number of holds in the first special figure hold display unit 71 is the number (number) of acquisitions of lottery values based on winning a prize in the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The second special figure hold display unit 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holdes in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (number) of acquisition of lottery values based on winning a prize in the second starting port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The number of holdings of the winning / failing lottery value is also displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp image.

A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. The ordinary symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps for convenience, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by the lighting combination thereof. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the off-stop symbol, and turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first hit mode, and the first. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol hold display unit 75 is provided as a hold lamp for the normal symbol change. The normal figure hold display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations according to the number of lighting or the number of blinking. The number of reserved normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the change of the normal symbol, and the number of normal symbol lottery for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed. Is shown.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game status is notified by turning on the lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and turning off when the normal state is in the normal state, and the 7-segment LED is displayed during the execution of the special game. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be individually configured, or may be divided into a plurality of display devices that are appropriately integrated. Further, the notification of the gaming state such as the specific gaming state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after the power is restored from the power failure.

At the substantially center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. The fluctuation of the including effect image is displayed. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variablely displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. As the decorative symbol 61, the effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols imitating a game of a slot machine are varied in a central region of the screen. In this embodiment, the symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and the combination of the three symbols finally stopped and displayed indicates hit or miss. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and these numbers, letters, and symbols are common to all symbols. It may be configured by adding a different pattern to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative symbol 61 is switched between the case where the symbol including the symbol is integrally displayed and the case where the symbols are separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the development of the effect. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative symbol 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the variation of the symbol.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player launches it with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed", it will almost certainly be the right side passage. The game ball can be passed through, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 is not limited to a single display device, but may be a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of displays, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a launch handle. It may be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that can be operated and input by the player. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the effect content, and the effect content or the like is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are oriented substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can grasp the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball plate 105.

The method and control flow of the game played in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched to the game area 81 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle. .. When the player fixes the rotation position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, etc., and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting. When a game ball falls into each of the general winning openings 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the lower. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game ball that has fallen into each winning opening such as the general winning opening 33 is treated as a safe ball, and the game ball that has fallen into the out opening 34 is treated as an out ball. The specification may be such that the discharge of the safe ball is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe ball is also guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. May be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the guide of the safe ball and the detection of the safe ball by the out detection device 39 are not performed, and the total of the number of detected balls of the safe ball added to the number of detected balls of the out ball is used as the number of ejected balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the variation display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stop-displayed symbol and the gaming state when the stop is displayed. .. That is, when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit mode in the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set so as to differ depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol is a hit with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first hit mode is selected) is 1/. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second hitting mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in the specific gaming state (for example, the easy entry state), the normal symbol is hit with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode is the same as that of the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (the opening time when the stop is displayed in the first hit mode is 0). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced by (extending from 1 second to 6.0 seconds). The function of extending the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long opening) may be referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as described above, by setting the probability of long opening to be higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state when the normal symbol is won. .. As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification may be the same for both, or the specification may be short opening without fail. good. Further, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, the easiness of entering the second starting port 12 may be enhanced by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy entry state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or the hold of the normal symbol change may be pre-read and notified before the start of the change of the normal symbol, or the normal symbol may be notified. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is lengthened to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an embodiment. Further, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of opening times may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, when the 2-second opening is 3 times, the total opening time is the same as when the 6-second opening is 1 time, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point. It can be said that the chance is long. Further, it may be configured so that there are a plurality of hit types of ordinary symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the 0.1 second opening is set once in the normal state, the 1 second opening is set three times in the easy entry state, and the second hit is the normal state. Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative symbol 61 are variablely displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variation display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variablely displayed according to a variable pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. The decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to a variable effect pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation effect patterns are prepared, and each has various fluctuation times, long and short. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are varied and displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. It will be stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The details of the fluctuation pattern and the method of determining the fluctuation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, when the variation starts, the symbols are varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one in the final stop mode. The symbol combination as is displayed. In addition, as an operation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it may be controlled to stop a plurality of rows at the same time instead of one row at a time so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol is noticed during the variable display, or the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed in a shorter fluctuation time. It may be possible to display the symbol variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the change of the decorative symbol 190, it is controlled to delay the start of the change of a part of the columns according to the subsequent development (type of effect pattern, etc.) in the change to produce a feeling of expectation. You may do it.

Next, the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable effect pattern includes a normal out-of-reach effect pattern, a reach out-of-reach effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal out-of-order effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a normal out-of-design pattern combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a combination of out-of-reach symbols through a reach state, which is a state in which one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is made. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when the symbol combination of the jackpot is displayed after the reach state. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various long and short fluctuation times, a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ". The normal out-of-reach effect pattern, the reach out-of-reach effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern have a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state, respectively. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol changes corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit will be accompanied by a probability change or the probability that the number of unit games of the special game will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry into the 1 starting port 11, a pattern for chance effect indicating that the chance is a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In the embodiment, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the time saving is accompanied in the probabilistic change state, the time saving pattern is also used in the probabilistic changing state. However, in the modified example, the specification may be such that a pattern for probabilistic change different from that for time saving is used in the probable change state. Alternatively, it may be a specification that uses a common pattern for the time saving and the probabilistic change, or may be a specification that uses the probabilistic change pattern in the probabilistic state without using the time saving pattern in particular.

When the number of pending winning / failing lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a miss is shorter than usual in order to improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortening fluctuation"). Similarly, when the number of pending win / fail lottery is 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a miss is further shortened as compared with the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the stop mode showing a big hit after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 showing a big hit is, for example, a combination mode in which three types of symbols match.

There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a big difference in the profits of the winning prize balls. Normally, the special game is started by displaying a production screen called the start demo time. After the screen display of the start demo time, the big winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or is temporarily closed after 9 or more game balls have fallen. The process from opening to closing of the large winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be a case where a plurality of short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 10 times, the special game is usually ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In normal special games, you can expect enough balls to enter 9 or more balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (this is also called "ball out") by 10 times of unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) than usual in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as a "substantial nR jackpot") similar to that of the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the large winning opening 20 is only repeated twice for a very short time, it is almost impossible to enter the large winning opening 20, and the number of balls is substantially zero or a small number (for example, number). This is a special game that is equal to the number of payouts depending on the number of balls entered in one round, such as balls to several tens of balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the predetermined small hit mode after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the small hit game composed of one unit game. The opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened only for about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar to the 2R big hit in appearance.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a winning / failing lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that it may not be clearly indicated from the appearance that the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and a latent probability change state may be set in which the decorative design or the production content is not explicitly notified. In that case, it is not clearly shown in the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change even during the probable change. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly shown to the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is completed, the easy entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed so that the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 is extended. Since the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 is also increased, it is highly possible that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it becomes possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls held or gradually increasing the number of balls held.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific gaming states, the so-called time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than in the normal state is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but the fluctuation time is reached. If a big hit occurs before, the time reduction will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in a short time, until a big hit occurs compared to the case where the symbol changes with the normal fluctuation time. It is possible to shorten the time of the game and relatively increase the ease of obtaining a big hit. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the special symbol is not shortened in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows a basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as a lottery when winning a prize in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content in the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display content particularly according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 according to the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number for the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing a setting to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as a game setting) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a big hit can be different depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification can be made for the player. When each of the jackpot probabilities from the setting 1 to the setting 6 is M1 to M6, M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦ M4 ≦ M5 ≦ M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of a game store, a setting change button 172 for changing a setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 for lighting and displaying, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and the setting key is turned to turn it on, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in order such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , It will be in a playable state. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes playable. When the setting key is turned off to enable the game, the setting display unit 173 is turned off and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key is on), the setting change state is entered when the RAM is cleared. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key on state, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the game-enabled state, and may function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting changing device 170 may not be provided so that the game setting cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows a functional block of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described, but in the present specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, a physical configuration such as a main board 200, a payout control board 155, a launch control board 157, etc. For convenience, the term may be used as it is for the part already explained as.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power source to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power source (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of the game ball to the game area, and a directing operation and processing are controlled. The function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning opening group (first general winning opening 33a, second general winning opening). It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like to indirectly transmit the launch control board 157. And also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball feed device 164, and the ball feed device 164 and the launch device 164 and the launch device are based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and electrical. It is connected to and sends and receives various control signals to and from each.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and the data transmission is performed. I can't even request it. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, data is transmitted / received bidirectionally between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, the configuration is such that data is transmitted and received from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155 in one direction, and the data is transmitted and received from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157 in one direction. It may be configured to send and receive data.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks may be used on other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Further, for example, a part of the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155, which is a part of the functional block. May be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a general drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, and a main board. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, It includes a main error detecting means 284, a setting changing means 286, a setting confirming means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11, and when it receives the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start opening 12. to decide. When the winning ball determination means 201 receives the large winning opening winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the large winning opening 20, and when it receives the general winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33. Upon receiving the passing information, the ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 has a "number of payout balls" ÷ "number of out balls" x 100 when the probability of a big hit is a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low entry ball). The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general drawing lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 ranges from "0" to "65535" as random numbers (also referred to as "win / fail lottery values") used in the win / fail lottery by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 is "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in the symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 has "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery value") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Random numbers in the range up to "" are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning / failing lottery by the normal figure lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" as a random number used when determining a normal symbol by a predetermined means. The "random numbers" here are not only physical random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit and genuine random numbers in the mathematical sense, but also pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But it may be. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, as the random number acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, a random number generated by the same generation means may be acquired, or a random number generated by another generation means may be acquired. ..

<Public map lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 generates random numbers of a random number used for winning or losing lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Obtain from 202 and execute the lottery. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 has a normal symbol winning / failing determination table (not shown) referred to for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct, and a normal symbol determination to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol winning / failing judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing and the winning, and the normal symbol judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stopped symbol and the normal symbol. Whether the normal symbol is correct or not and the stop symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is set. When it corresponds to the deviation, the aspect of the deviation symbol of 1 is always determined. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stop symbol and the gaming state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the time of short opening and 6 seconds at the time of long opening. The lottery value of the ordinary symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined holding upper limit number held by the holding control means 240 is not exceeded.

<1st lottery means 211 and 2nd lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a function of executing a first lottery related to the first game, such as a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first hit / miss determination means 221 and a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The first winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery corresponding to the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11, including the means 231. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second hit / fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entry into the second starting port 12. The second winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<1st lottery value acquisition means 216 and 2nd lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting port 11. Specifically, the first winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern. The first pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first winning / failing determination means 221 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determination means 222 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. In the hit / fail judgment, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the game shifts to the special game, "small hit" indicating the shift to the small hit game, and "not shifting to the special game and the small hit game". It is determined which of the two is "off". The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a hit / miss determination table referred to in the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the hit / fail judgment executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary hit / fail judgment described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "hit / fail judgment as the main judgment". In the present specification, when the term "table" or "selection criterion" is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined by a table structure. In addition to pointing to data, it is also broadly included to be realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but when the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is used, the subdivisions may be used. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

The first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit / fail determination as a hit / fail determination table to be referred to in the hit / fail determination. Specifically, a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as “first hit / miss judgment table”) and a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222 (“second hit / miss judgment table”). The table to be referred to is selected according to the pass / fail judgment to be executed while holding the "hit / fail judgment table"). In the plurality of winning / failing determination tables, the determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability is determined according to the range setting of the associated big hit. In addition, a plurality of types of win / fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. For example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the win / fail judgment table in which the correspondence between the win / fail lottery value and the win / fail judgment result is different. Is prepared. If the probabilities of big hit, small hit, and miss are the same among the plurality of game settings, a win / fail determination table common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table. This figure shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to the setting 6. In the hit / fail judgment table of this figure, the judgment result of big hit, small hit, and miss is associated with the win / miss lottery value, and the big hit / small hit probability and the small hit / miss probability according to each associated range setting. Is decided. The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 refer to the hit / fail determination table of the present figure in the hit / miss determination as the present determination. In both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and it becomes a big hit not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 299 but also when it corresponds to the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range in both normal time and probability change time, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change time. It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning / failing lottery value does not fall within the large hit range, it will be a small hit if it falls within the predetermined range. In the example of this figure, when the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 corresponds to the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit is obtained, and the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the range corresponding to the small hit is wider in the first win / fail lottery than in the second win / fail lottery, and the small hit is likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it is originally all "off", but in the example of this figure, if it does not correspond to a big hit but also does not correspond to a small hit, the winning / losing lottery value range Is particularly expressed as "off". That is, when "hit or miss" is considered from the viewpoint of "whether or not it is a big hit", "small hit" may be included in the broad sense of "missing" in the sense of "not a big hit". In addition, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "small hit" may be included in "hit" in a broad sense together with "big hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for whether or not it is a big hit and the judgment table for whether or not it is a small hit are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but even if each is realized as a separate table. good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. FIG. 3A shows the correspondence between the first hit / miss lottery value acquired by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the win / fail determination result. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence between the second hit / miss lottery value acquired by the second hit / miss determination means 222 and the hit / fail determination result. The range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits during normal times and probability changes, is 0 to 294 if the set value is "1", 0 to 295 if the set value is "2", and the set value "2". If it is "3", it is 0 to 296, if it is a set value "4", it is 0 to 297, if it is a set value "5", it is 0 to 298, and if it is a set value "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit in the normal time increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the normal time increases. Further, the range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits only at the time of probability change (that is, out of the normal case), should be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1" and the set value "2". If 296 to 2959, if the set value is "3", 297 to 2769, if the set value is "4", 298 to 2979, if the set value is "5", 299 to 2899, and if the set value is "6", then It is 300 to 2999. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit at the time of probability change also increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit at the time of probability change also increases. The range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during normal times, and the jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during probability changes, is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is defined so that the probability of the jackpot at the time of probability change is 10 times the probability of the jackpot at the normal time, and it is common to all the set values "1" to "6". .. In addition, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the probability of a small hit is constant regardless of the set value. In all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit is obtained when the range of the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 56500 to 65535, and a small hit is made when the range of the second winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535. It will be a hit. The range of the winning / failing lottery value outside the range of big hits or small hits is "out of order". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the winning / failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between the different set values.

<1st symbol determining means 226 and 2nd symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the winning / failing determination. .. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determining means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second symbol determination means 227 is the hit / fail by the second hit / miss determination means 222. Holds a plurality of symbol judgment tables according to the judgment result. The first hit / miss determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit referred to at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit referred to at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a loss referred to at the time of a miss. The second hit / miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation from the prior symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "design determination as the main determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7A is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7B is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and FIG. 7C is a table to be referred to. It is a table to be referred when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the present figure in the symbol determination as the present determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the big hit, small hit, and missed hit / fail judgment results, respectively. "0" to "4" correspond to the big hit, and "5" to "9" correspond to the small hit. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the types of special symbols "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of probability fluctuations during the big hit and after the big hit. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "substantially 4R hit") with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each type of jackpot (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot can be increased while increasing the symbol types. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more types of jackpots in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Further, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is configured to correspond to each of the type of special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set so that the ratio of probability fluctuation is the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value in the entire range when the hit / fail determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be stopped and displayed in the case of deviation. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the case of disengagement.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the types of special symbols "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the range "0 to 49" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "6" is associated with the range "50 to 99" of the symbol lottery value. The type "7" is associated with the range "100 to 149" of the symbol lottery value, the type "8" is associated with the range "150 to 199" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "9" is the range of the symbol lottery value. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-symbol determination table in the pre-symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. In addition, as a preliminary symbol determination table, a table that can be further subdivided to enable complicated determination, or a table in which the determination range of the jackpot symbol for executing the same special game is summarized and simplified may be used. .. In addition, when the symbol is uniformly determined at the time of disengagement as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for disengagement. You may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined as the second pattern lottery value acquired from the random number generation means 202. Determine from multiple variation patterns based on. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 respectively refer to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The control means of the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 and the main board 200 refer to the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the starting port. Holds or shares the pre-pattern judgment table used to generate information for determining the execution of the look-ahead process at the time of entering the ball. The fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and has various long and short fluctuation times depending on the type. That is, in each fluctuation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is set when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern determination executed at the start of the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern even though the variation time is the same.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of the present figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of the present figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the winning / failing determination result is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "normal", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "3". 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, select "out of reach" of the pattern range number "4". As "out of reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds, and when the number of holdings is 3, the fluctuation pattern is 7 seconds and the number of holdings. When is 4, a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to the fluctuation time will be described, but a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are prepared for each of these fluctuation patterns in the sub-board 300, and dozens of types of variation effect patterns are prepared in total. Is equivalent to being associated with the lottery value range of each category.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "normal 1", "normal 2", and "out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holdings increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern is different for each number of holdings, it is possible to realize control in which a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of holdings is small.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "8". 2 ”is selected.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 transmit the preliminary determination result to the effect determining means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number is set to the first correctness. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning / failing lottery and the number of holds. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, it is illustrated that a table is provided for each of the winning / failing determination results in the preliminary pattern determination. In addition to deriving only information regarding which range it is located in, the control means side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is executed together with the preliminary pass / fail determination result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery value is assigned to the variation pattern for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that of FIG. “Reachless loss shortening” is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reachless loss” in FIG. 8 (a). For "shortening without reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holdings is 0, 1 and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the number of holdings is 2 to 4. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed in preference to the first lottery, the second lottery is easy to enter despite the time saving. The situation in which the hold of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the deviation variation in the first lottery in the easy entry state, a variation pattern table is referred to in which a variation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes the special figure hold means 241 and the normal figure hold means 242. When the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value acquired before that. When is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first win / fail lottery value or the second win / fail lottery value is suspended, and the winning / failing lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, the upper limit is four, the first winning / failing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, and for the second special symbol, the upper limit is four each. The second winning / failing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal figure holding means 242 stores the normal figure lottery value acquired by the normal figure lottery means 213 as a holding ball. These holding numbers are represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure holding display unit 71, the second special figure holding display unit 72, and the normal figure holding display unit 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure hold means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery held by the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big hit lottery value is reserved as the first winning / losing lottery, as long as the lottery value is reserved as the second winning / failing lottery, the symbol change corresponding to the big hit lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if there is a jackpot hold as the first win / fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive jackpots can be obtained by continuing to hit until the jackpot hold is entered as the second win / fail lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251, a second special figure control means 252, and a normal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let me. The first special symbol control means 251 sets as a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let me. The second special symbol control means 252 also has a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed.

When the special figure holding means 241 stores the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery, the first special figure controlling means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery regardless of whether or not the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved in both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the symbol change does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 are varied by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and the timing of stopping the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the variation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing determination result, the stop symbol, and the variation pattern determined or determined as the final determination and a value indicating whether it is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal map lottery means 213 as a variation display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is performed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball has entered the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. The variation display of 52 is prioritized over the variation display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the second winning / failing lottery value is always preferentially digested, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the variation of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the balls into the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively varied and displayed. For example, when the ball enters in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. Will be done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the holding control means 240 and stores the holding order of the winning / failing lottery value. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order of the game ball, that is, the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the change order.

In another modification, the special symbol adjusting means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the ball entry order. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Since which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the ball entry order of the game ball, the player can easily grasp the order of the change.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a hitting manner, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variation display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbol is not started while the special game is executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 is a random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the execution of various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information about the change of the first special symbol before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Is used to determine in advance information about the change of the second special symbol before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-design lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first win / fail lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the pre-determination results, and the information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to in the preliminary hit / fail determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9A when the ball enters the first start opening 11, and the win / fail lottery value. When is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as a preliminary hit / fail determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the first symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that effect is set as the advance symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the first pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (preliminary hit / fail determination regarding the first game) is the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / failing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9B when the ball enters the second start opening 12, and the win / fail lottery. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary hit / fail determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "64000 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (preliminary hit / fail determination regarding the second game) is the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / failing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in the predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to 4 each, as in the case of the reserved storage number. The preliminary determination result may be stored using the hold storage area stored by the hold control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information based on the completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, the judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing the table dedicated to the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game may be used. A part or all of them may share a common prejudgment table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 will be reduced. The content to be transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of whether or not the result is transmitted. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the above-mentioned command communication means 205 without being determined by the pre-determination means 235, and the sub-board. It may be configured to judge the content of the preliminary judgment by 300.

The pre-determining means 235 may refer to a pre-winning lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the prior winning / failing determination result is different according to the set value set by the setting changing device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned winning / failing determination table, a plurality of types of advance winning / failing lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the prior winning / failing lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set value of the game setting. In addition, a pre-win / fail lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the winning / failing may be preliminarily determined by the combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-winning / failing determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table corresponding to the game setting. FIG. 3A is a pre-hit / fail determination table referred to by the first lottery pre-determination means 236, and FIG. 3B is a pre-hit / fail determination table referred to by the second lottery pre-determination means 237. When the winning / failing lottery value is "0 to 294", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "11", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings 1 to 6. When the winning / failing lottery value is "295", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "12", indicating that the setting is 2 or more in the normal state or all the settings at the time of probability change are big hits. When the winning / failing lottery value is "296", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "13", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 3 or more at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "297", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "14", indicating that a big hit is obtained in the setting 4 or more in the normal time or all the settings in the probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "15", indicating that the setting is 5 or more in the normal state or all the settings at the time of probability change are big hits. When the winning / failing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "16", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 6 at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. Further, when the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "21", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "22", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting 3 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2980 to 2899", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "25", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 5 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". 30 ”, indicating that it is a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "644000 to 65535", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". 40 ”, indicating that all settings are out of order. By using such a preliminary hit / fail determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary hit / fail determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the special game control means 260 results in the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicating a shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 4 times, and a 2R jackpot in which the unit game having a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated only twice. The 10R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win / fail lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win / fail lottery. In the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same opening mode as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the open / close control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls a normal game in a probable change state, a time saving state, and a ball entry easy state. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state after the end of the special game when the special symbol is the symbol of the specific jackpot accompanied by the transition to the probable change. The probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy-to-enter state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select the variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of holdings of the winning / failing lottery value by the holding control means 240 is referred to, and as the number of holdings by the holding control means 240 decreases, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of probabilistic change of the normal symbol, shortening of the time of the normal symbol, and opening extension of the second starting port 12 is performed to enter the second starting port 12. Ball frequency (easiness of ball entry) is improved. During the probabilistic state, the probability that the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 will be a big hit is maintained at a high value. Further, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning / failing lottery is the second winning / failing lottery. Move to a probabilistic state higher than the normal probability state.

<Open / close control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 in the opening time of short opening or long opening according to the result of the opening lottery, and in the easy entry state, the opening time of long opening is the first. 2 The starting port 12 is opened. This is intended to improve the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 12 so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. In the special game, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning opening solenoid 92 to open the large winning opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power cut processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The main power cutoff processing executing means 282 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the main board 200 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The main error detecting means 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing, abnormality response processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing means 286 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the setting changing state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. When the setting change state is changed to the setting change state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. The setting changing means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... in response to the pressing of the setting change button 172. , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the display of the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the game setting. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory when the setting confirmation state is entered. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may not be the numerical value of "1" to "6" but may use the numerical value of "0" to "5" instead. In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to the setting 4. , The setting value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM clear process is performed when the RAM is abnormal, and when the set value data is set to the initial value "0", the abnormality is not judged. Can be simplified. Further, when executing some kind of lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the look-ahead processing, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 use the numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical values of the setting value data may be displayed as they are on the setting display unit 173, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 transmits the payout control command communication means 206 that sends the control command necessary for executing the payout or the like to the payout control board 155, and the sub-control that sends the control command necessary for executing the effect control or the like to the sub-board 300. Includes command transmission means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the winning ball to each winning opening by the winning ball determining means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command indicating the status of the error that occurred in. When the sub-control command transmission means 207 starts the symbol change, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol change to the effect determination means 303 together with the symbol change control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 fluctuates at the timing at which the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the variation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing determination result, the stop symbol, and the variation pattern determined or determined as the final determination and a value indicating whether it is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303. After the pre-judgment result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first start port 11, second start) corresponding to the pre-judgment result are started regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is started immediately. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of reserved pieces, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the so-called "look-ahead" process is realized, in which the sub-board 300 can speculatively recognize the winning / failing result before the order of starting the symbol variation comes around based on the received prior determination result. The processing based on the prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is set by the special game control means 260 information about the special game, the small hit game control means 265 information about the small hit game, the general drawing lottery means 213 lottery result information, and the setting change means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information about various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, an effect determining means 303, an effect controlling means 304, a timekeeping means 307, an effect setting means 308, a sub initial process executing means 360, a sub power cut processing executing means 362, and the like. The sub-error detecting means 364, the command receiving means 370, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are defined in the variation of the decorative symbol 61. In the effect pattern, a plurality of variation effect patterns in which the variation process from the start to the stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are defined, and the variation display of the decorative symbol are displayed separately, and the degree of expectation for a big hit. It includes a plurality of notice effect patterns that suggest the height of the variable display before the stop of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determination means 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal effect determining means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery or the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. The content of the effect to be output to the 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc. is determined. The effect determining means 303 determines the effect content according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and determines the effect content to be output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the like. .. The normal effect determining means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. Select one and read it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determining means 373 sends the read out information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that the variation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variation is combined with the content of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead effect determination means 374. The production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 more accurately identifies and identifies the result of this determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary determination result held on the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the final determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current gaming state is in the probability fluctuation game, and then shifts to the normal gaming state based on the pre-determination result before the pre-determination result received this time. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the judgment result, the pass / fail result of this judgment and the selected fluctuation pattern related to the pre-judgment result received this time are specified, and the execution possibility of the look-ahead effect and the execution content of the look-ahead effect are determined based on the specific result. .. Since there are many parts in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as the effect determining means 303 including both, except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation effect pattern, the variation time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the effect image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and their arrangement by the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is decided according to the variation effect pattern of the design. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. Is selected for a specific combination, for example, a combination in which three symbols such as "777" and "111" are aligned. When the hit / fail judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. If the hit / fail judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" and "946", and it is a specific combination selected for a 2R big hit or a small hit. The combination that does not apply is selected. If the hit / fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a loss with reach is selected, a combination such as "191" or "727" in which only one symbol is not aligned. Select.

The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, the effect process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation. The variable effect pattern includes a pattern for displaying a normal out-of-order symbol, a pattern for displaying an out-of-order symbol through a reach state that becomes a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and a big hit symbol after a reach state. The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation effect pattern, the variation time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for reducing working hours, the effect determining means 303 is a variation in which the effect content for reducing working hours is determined. Select a production pattern. The content of the effect for shortening the time is an effect of outputting a background image or sound that impresses the player in an advantageous state due to the shortened time or the probability change.

The notice effect pattern is an effect pattern for temporarily displaying an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern for operating an accessory, or an effect pattern for outputting a specific voice. The effect of the advance notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change is highly expected to stop in the jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal advance notice effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group advance notice effect in which a group of a large number of characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. Further, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (notice after reach) in which the effect is executed at the timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state to announce the final stop mode of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at the timing when it is not stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the advance notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the winning / failing lottery or the advance determination result by a predetermined advance notice lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the notice production pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery or the preliminary judgment result, and if the winning / failing lottery is successful, the notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than in the case of losing. Therefore, the correspondence between the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to suggest a high degree of expectation for a big hit by displaying the notice effect itself.

The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative symbol 61 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the change start command of the decorative symbol 61 as a condition for starting the variation display of the new decorative symbol. When it is determined by the effect determining means 303 that the advance notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect according to the selected advance notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form of superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation. Let me.

If the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery, and whether the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / losing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first win / fail lottery and the second win / fail lottery, the lottery value held in the second win / fail lottery is preferentially read out and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the change of the decorative symbol does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 includes an effect display control means 305, a voice control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls the sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, a normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is variablely displayed, but in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is the main production content. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the symbol is being changed by variablely displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than that of the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal size decorative pattern, but when it is distinguished from an alternative pattern, the normal size decorative pattern is also referred to as a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern".

The alternative symbol is displayed while the legibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting a hit / fail judgment result in a dramatic manner, has a simpler (in other words, simplified, simplified) display form than the normal decorative symbol, and is a normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a simpler fluctuation process. The alternative symbol has an appearance display form corresponding to a portion indicating a symbol type of a normal decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display form representing a number, a character, or a symbol indicating the symbol type. Further, the alternative symbol is variablely displayed in a narrower area than the area where the decorative symbol is normally variablely displayed, and is typically at a position where the main effect by elements other than the symbol is not easily hindered, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. It is displayed in a variable manner. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. The alternative symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol as it is, or may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / failing lottery will be in a favorable state to the player depending on the combination of the stop modes at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it is suggested that the plurality of alternative symbols have a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation by being in a reach state in which two of the three alternative symbols are in a reach state. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state are specific types of symbols that suggest that the expectations are relatively high, such as "3" and "7", and the expectations such as "1" and "2" are high. By making a pattern of a kind that suggests that it is relatively low, it may indicate whether the degree of expectation of the reach state is high or low. It should be noted that the alternative symbol does not enter a definite stop state in appearance, but becomes a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the substitute symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in a fixed stop state. Further, instead of displaying the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern exclusively, the display period may overlap. Furthermore, at a predetermined effect in which the legibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the variation display of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the variation of the alternative symbol may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, the special symbol is changing in an image as small as or smaller than the alternative symbol in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A simple symbol suggesting that there is may be displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol may be composed of a variable display of three symbol combinations as in the normal decorative symbol, a variable display of one symbol, or a simple symbol ("○", "×", etc.). May be configured by sequentially switching. The simple symbol has no relation to the variation display mode of the normal decorative symbol or the alternative symbol, and displays a certain variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol, and is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative symbol at the time of stop display. May be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol is at least notified, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be referred to as a "sub-decorative design", a "sub-decorative design", a "mini-decorative design", a "mini-decorative design", or the like. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative symbol called a fourth symbol, which indicates a display equivalent to a simple symbol by a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during change of the special symbol, display of the result) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LEDs light up in sequence of "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). It may be displayed in a variable manner, or it may be displayed in a single color according to the type of the special symbol to indicate the variable display, and the emission color when the stop display may be used to indicate the type of off or big hit.

The timekeeping means 307 is a timekeeping circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The timekeeping means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from the time when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit having a built-in battery and capable of continuously measuring the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or when a power failure occurs may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that the time of each game console may differ slightly due to individual differences or time deviations, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a tuning effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The tuning effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The tuning effect period extends for several minutes, the length of which is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect pattern defines the reproduction of a predetermined music and video. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronized effects are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The entrainment effect is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or a special game. Here, "during normal game" includes the display of the so-called standby demo screen. That is, "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which the symbol is variablely displayed, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which neither the variable display of the symbol nor the standby demo screen is displayed. , (3) "Normal game while displaying the standby demo screen", which is not displaying the variation of the symbol but displaying the standby demo screen, is included. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). It can be different from the time of. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile cooperation system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation is input, the video and audio of the synchronized effect are output. It is suppressed, and the screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperation system is prioritized.

The tuning effect is, for example, an effect of playing a performance or a video of a predetermined song at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronization effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the tuning effect may be the time reached at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time every hour or half hour based on the standard time. May be. Alternatively, a time that may differ depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as "every hour". The interval may vary depending on the date and day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same tuning effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power is turned on, a game store turns on a plurality of units at the same time. As a result, the same tuning effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of game consoles when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if they were synchronized by multiple units, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being screened on the spot. A directing effect can be obtained.

The function of entrainment effect is also built into another game console of the same model, and multiple game consoles on the same game island are turned on at the same time by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of game consoles that are turned on at the same time all reach the synchronization effect start time almost at the same time, and the synchronization effect can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only the display of the image is synchronized with multiple units, but also the output of sound effects and background music is synchronized with multiple units, and the more units are synchronized, the more synergistic effect is obtained by executing the production all at once. It will increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of production results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the ball output that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of the production result is different from the profit in the game, and is recorded in order to obtain the profit such as the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier for a specific type of production to appear. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give it to the player, coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and the game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. The cooperation system between the gaming machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that the items that can be customized increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of a plurality of types of effect content options is selected as the effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as an effect pattern to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different displayed motifs, characters, and songs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is made to select which effect is to be displayed. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design that changes the design, and the player is allowed to select which of the designs is to be displayed. In such a case, when the player accepts the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected content. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the sub-board 300 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The sub-error detecting means 364 executes the abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power cutoff, the sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power cutoff process.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile phone cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player registers the user by setting an account and a password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site in advance on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays the two-dimensional code 350, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, on the screen of the effect display device 60. The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") in which the player's identification information and the effect score history are encoded is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the password information input screen on the effect display device 60, and causes the player to input the password information via a button operation such as a cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the effect setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and the effect score history, the player's previous game content and effect score state can be inherited. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start the effect customization for selecting various effect elements. After that, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and the production progress, the points given by the effect setting means 308 to the player as a benefit in the effect are added as needed and accumulated as the effect score history, and the player. Can customize the effect at any time and select and set the desired element as various effect elements. The score for the production is basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the production type with the higher expectation for the transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher the score is given even when the transition to the special game is performed.

As an effect customization, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and according to the number of points used, the color, the background, the shape, the character, and the colors, the background, the shape, the character, which constitute the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60. You can change the production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element via a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the effect elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 in which information such as a privilege on the effect and the effect score history is encoded, and controls the effect display. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as production benefits and production score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via a transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and the production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of productions increase, and the score can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The entry signal from each entry port, the payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as a result of a winning / losing lottery, a result of determining a symbol, and a result of determining a variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by transmitting the command type data and the command content data to the sub board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data is used. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that the instruction type data is the most significant bit. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification in which 1 byte of data is transmitted for each data transmission, so it is necessary to transmit 1 byte each twice in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. .. The MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and the EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in succession by the sub board 300, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is confirmed. .. The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read two times in a row, and transmits the same data up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. A sub control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives and outputs an effect display device 60, a speaker 108, a decorative lamp 111, a movable accessory 66, and the like by an effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data. , Voice output, lamp lighting, and control of the production by the movement of the accessory. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated and connected to each other. It may be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for a variation display or an effect display as an effect object showing a judgment result of a winning / failing lottery. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and display control is performed by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, commands and voice data related to voice output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the voice control circuit 314, and voice output control is performed by the voice control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via the bus 330. The bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area for decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 332, or as a work area for executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 336. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing a frame of a moving image to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be called "rough display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the schematic display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes such as fluctuation start and fluctuation stop timings of decorative symbols, playback order of a plurality of moving images, and playback start and stop timings. .. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When the effect control device 313 performs display control based on the "rough display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads out the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. And execute the display process. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display putter data including the "rough display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "rough display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and simply "display pattern data" is used. ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "rough display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "rough display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data that serves as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute a process that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also have the functions of the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326. In this case, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which the effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312. In the modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the effect control device 313. In this case, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, and will be described below as being executed by the main CPU 290 that functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial hardware-related settings such as the setting of the internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). If the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, the power supply cutoff / recovery process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power supply cutoff information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power off / recovery is executed. do. In other cases, that is, even when the RAM clear switch is turned on or the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power failure information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power cutoff information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed when the power is turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. Check the data in the main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process for returning to the state before the power is turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initial setting of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Subsequently, the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared by 0, the initial setting of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the set value stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 is not cleared, and the set value set in the setting change process of S124 is retained as it is.

When the power cutoff / recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, after that, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y in S132), the processing in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state shifts to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The state shifts to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. (S162) makes the set value invisible and returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power failure (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power supply cutoff storage is executed by inputting an unconditional interruption request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, the power off confirmation data is stored in the power off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, proceed to S212. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random value per special symbol, and the soft initial value random value per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number update process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When the power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off error data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, in order to inspect the backed up data of the main RAM 291 at the next power-on, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. The main power cutoff processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290 executes the above-mentioned processing when the power is turned off.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd start port valid period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol change start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening valid period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), handle status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), and external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch mounted on the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal is monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state are level data (data of the input port at the time of this interruption) and rising data or falling data (data of the input port at the time of this interruption and data at the time of the previous interruption). Data indicating a switch in which switching was observed by comparing the data of the input port with an exclusive logical sum).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. Ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern Random numbers are read from the main RAM 291. If the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is equal to or more than the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the subtraction result is stored when the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, and the predetermined maximum value is stored when the result is less than 0. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291 and the value of the random number is incremented. If the result of the increment exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, it goes around the range of random numbers. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the result of the increment exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. At the second starting port 12, the valid period in which the prize ball is paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed by the entry of the game ball, and the prize ball is paid out and the second special even if the game ball enters. An invalid period is set in which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for winning the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the game ball enters the second start port 12. Even so, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol will not be executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set in the first starting port 11, the large winning opening 20, the first operating opening 31, the second operating opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory is operating", the data indicating that the second start port 12 is the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory is operating" and the value of the second start port effective extension timer is not 0, the second start port 12 is the valid period in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the data indicating that the second start port is in the invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball to the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of commands.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol actuating gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the first actuating port 31 and the second actuating port 32 of the game ball is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first actuating port 31 or the second actuating port 32. When the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the number of reserved ordinary symbols is updated and the random numbers related to the ordinary symbols are stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", the normal symbol changing process is executed, and if it is "normal symbol stop symbol display", the normal symbol stop symbol display processing is executed and "normal electric" is executed. If "the accessory is in operation", the process during the operation of the normal electric accessory is executed, and if it is "during the demonstration of the end of the operation of the ordinary electric accessory", the process during the demonstration of the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory is executed. In the process of changing the normal symbol, after changing the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has ended, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is set and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric accessory is in operation", the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the start of operation of the normal electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the normal electric accessory is started. The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of off, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change". When the winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball are monitored in the processing during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. Performs the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start port. If it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is used. If it is determined that the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the above is completed and the opening of the entrance of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second starting opening are valid. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not ended, the setting of opening / closing the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the process during the demonstration of the end of operation of the normal electric accessory, the operation end demo time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demo time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 has ended, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". Set to "Waiting for fluctuation".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S324), when the state of the normal symbol is monitored, "waiting for normal symbol change", and the value of the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is other than 0, the normal symbol changes. Judge to start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is decremented, and the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. .. After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the determination of the fluctuation pattern is cleared.

In the start opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is added. It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the jackpot judgment. Further, as random numbers related to the special symbol, a symbol random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored. When the hold of the second special symbol is prioritized over the hold of the first special symbol, only the update of the hold related to the prize is executed, but when the hold order of the special symbol is the winning order, the hold is executed. In addition to updating the hold related to the prize, the total number of holds is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening prize, if the state of the gaming machine is confirmed and it is determined that the command transmission period is reached, a hit notice effect request, a hit design notice effect request, and a pattern notice are requested. Execute the production requests in order. Here, when (1) waiting for a hit and the random number related to the first special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not activated, or (3) when the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit. , Judge that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, four pieces of the prior determination information (preliminary hit / fail determination information, prior symbol determination information, prior pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the starting port, the command is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub CPU 310 may perform various situation determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port validity period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting port validity period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is a valid period, the first starting port winning prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is an invalid period, the monitoring process of the second starting port winning is not executed. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation described later is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not operating, the state of the special symbol is inspected, if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is terminated, and if it is "start of change", the special symbol change. The start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", the special symbol change process is executed, and if "special symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the special symbol stop symbol display process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the effect display is started on the sub-board 300. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol variation in progress", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. .. In the process during special symbol change, after the special symbol is changed, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the change time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously activated is set, and the probability of the special symbol is set. The variable function, the variable time shortening function of the special symbol, the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the variable time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory are disabled, and the state of the gaming machine is prepared to open the big winning opening. Set in, set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo effect, and command request for launch position specification effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests a recommended launch position such as "right-handed") To execute. When the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is performed. In order to end the operation of, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the gaming machine during the small hit start demo, set the hit start demo display time, and set the hit start demo effect. Execute a command request and a command request for a firing position designation effect. If the result of the hit judgment is wrong, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is displayed. In order to terminate the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", and the command request for the firing position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric accessory, the processing during preparation for opening the large winning opening, the processing during operation of the special electric accessory, the processing during closing of the large winning opening, the processing during the big hit end demonstration, the processing during the small hit start demonstration, the small hit special electric Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and processing during demonstration of the end of small hit.

In the large winning opening valid period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of the valid period determination of the large winning opening 20, if the value of the large winning opening valid time is 0, the large winning opening valid period flag is set to a large winning prize. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big winning opening validity period flag.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the change can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the big hit or the small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for change, (3). ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change and (4) the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start changing. Is determined. If the order of digestion of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) the relevant When all of the determinations that the digestion order, that is, the winning order is matched, are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start to change.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Next, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, a random number per special symbol is used to determine whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the missed symbol is lost. Is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the operation content of the special symbol is determined. Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation content of the fluctuation time shortening function and the setting of the normal symbol winning easy state. Next, the settings during the big hit, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big winning opening, are executed. Next, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and the end demo time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the content of the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set, and the hit is made by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends. The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is wrong, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door / frame opening signal, and changes in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the game machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the error state effect display request are not executed.

In the incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detecting means 284 monitors the continuous on time of each switch level in order to detect the incoming ball passing time abnormality, and the continuous on time (continuous on time). For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the ball entry passage time error, the command transmission request, and the security of outputting to the external information output terminal 160. Create output requests in sequence. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality of the ball entry transit time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol are requested to be displayed. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch state of the handle, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is changed. Update, set the handle status monitoring timer, and execute the command transmission request for the handle status effect. If it is determined that there is no change in the handle status as a result of the inspection, the handle status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are continuous. Initialization of the display to display the number of times of operation, display of the operation status of the special electric accessory when the continuous operation device of the accessory is not activated, display of hitting, display of error, display of prize ball ratio. , Acquire and output display data in order.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition / permit for launching corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition / permission data, the firing prohibition / permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data. The operation flag and the operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer are acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a transmission request for the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the command buffer used is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, retain MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per normal symbol and a random number with a fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol as random numbers related to the normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to the special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, as random numbers for giving initial values of normal symbol per random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, which are initial value update type random numbers, normal symbol per initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending changes in the normal symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for the hit determination and the determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is reserved for normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. When the number is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol variation is to be started.

The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , It is generated by acquiring the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol and adding them, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start opening monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from a given position in the above and used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is set to a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start opening monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The symbol random number per special symbol is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is a predetermined value of the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have the same range as the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308). It is used as the initial value of each random number when updating the soft random number per symbol.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interruption, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. To. That is, the random number per ordinary symbol, the random number of the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the random number of the symbol per special symbol, and the random number of the variation pattern are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the time from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. It is repeated only for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), It is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial process execution means 360, and will be described below as being executed by the sub CPU 310 that functions as the sub-initial process execution means 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interruptions until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Perform the initial settings related to the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and placed in the sub RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the zero clear data is set for the variable without the initial value. This initializes the sub RAM 311 (S506). The interrupt process on the sub-board 300 includes a process when the power is turned on and a reset process when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as the interrupt process executed with the highest priority. Next, there is a command process received from the main board 200 as an interrupt process of priority level 7 having a high execution priority, and as an interrupt process of priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by a watchdog timer is performed. There is a time reset process. Next, as the priority level 2 interrupt process, there is a process related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320, and as the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process, communication process with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts set in advance for each interrupt type are executed with priority. The processing shown in this figure includes the processing when the power supply is turned on, which is the interrupt of the highest priority level, the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when the CPU runaway is detected, which is the interruption of the priority level 3. include.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information stored in advance for all models (S512). .. All the lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to the main flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (small power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. In order to check in the main process of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in S506 of FIG. 20, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processes. All interruptions are allowed (S532), and device initialization operations such as motors and solenoids are executed (S534).

If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, clear the watchdog timer (S536), update the decorative symbol counter so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and input the sub CPU 310. Is monitored (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining an out-of-order symbol of a decorative symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining an out-of-decoration symbol of a decorative symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all combinations of symbols that are out-of-order symbols. Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detecting means 364, monitors the error state, notifies the error when various errors are detected (S544), and executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). Execute the advance notice lottery (S548). In the advance notice lottery in S548, since the command of the advance notice effect to appear immediately after the start of the symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but a plurality of times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the symbol change is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, or a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random number is updated as a low priority process that may be performed in free time (S556), and the process returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed shows the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the processing of this S552, and when the command to be analyzed indicates the stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is displayed. If the method is used to determine the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority next to the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y of S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). The hard random number is acquired for the subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned. By acquiring a hard random number each time a main command is interrupted from the main board 200 in this way, the randomness of the value is enhanced without causing periodicity in the random number acquisition timing. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data). The command write pointer which is the read position in the ring buffer) is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command light pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, skip S610 and later (N in S608) and return to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to the effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and is generated in a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the command data has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side from the control CPU 320. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control such as a decorative lamp 111, control of a solenoid or a motor for driving a movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and is generated in a cycle of 1 ms. Since it is the interrupt of priority level 1 with the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the effect button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure , Processes the input / output of ports that input / output drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power failure is input, the backup process is immediately started. Update the data related to device control such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids and on / off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642 (S644), and set a timer to measure the timing of the effect. Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. To create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Further, when counting a relatively long period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, if a count with a 10 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms. The count value can be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

There are 16 types of tasks from processes 0 to 15 in the task control, one of which is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter to realize switching in a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processes 0 and 8, and when the count values of the task control counters are 0 and 8, that is, once every 80 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring is realized in a cycle of 8 ms.

It should be noted that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is on / off inverted every frame, and if this toggle signal does not change continuously at the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 is used. Sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 in a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored in a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period such as an error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends at the time-out.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning / failing lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second winning / failing determination means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and the second winning / failing is determined. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 and the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 is started (S716).

When the second winning / failing lottery value is not held (N of S700) and the first winning / failing lottery value is held (Y of S708), the first winning / failing determination means 221 is the first winning / failing lottery. The value is read out and the hit / fail of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first hit / miss determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 is the first. 1 The variation pattern of the special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / failing lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The symbol variation display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display is stopped after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), the fluctuation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbol variation. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the change start and effect display contents from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and pass / fail determination result. The aspect is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y of S756), the already determined variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not a symbol change that is the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display the predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is set. If it is a symbol change that is the trigger that was turned on (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N in S756), or if the variable effect pattern contains a specific effect content (Y in S758), the processes from S760 to S764 are skipped.

After that, the variation effect display of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative symbol and (S768), the display process of the notice effect is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. When S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) and a variable stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined in S752 to stop the symbol variation display (S774). ), The variable effect of the decorative pattern is finished (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect process of the special game (S800), and the open / close control means 275 opens the large winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N of S804) and the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the game returns to S804 (N of S806) and the predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S806). Although the opening time has not passed (Y of S804) (N of S804), when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y of S806), the open / close control means 275 is the large winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds to return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is displayed. The control means 305 ends the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy-to-enter state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822). When the time has passed (Y of S822), the large winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing for the set number of times has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing to return to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y in S8286), the small hit game is ended.

In the prerequisite technique, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game has one big hit than the first game. Although it was designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball in, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball than the second game. However, the first game and the second game may be designed so that the expected value of winning a prize ball is substantially equal to each other. In the latter case, the special game executed in the first game may be designed so that the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed seven times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in a second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% is executed. However, there may be a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. Further, in any case, a specific area is provided in the large winning opening, and when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game is completed. It may be configured to perform a specific game such as a probabilistic state. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit is made in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when the big hit is made in the first game. It may be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probable change state is executed after the end of the special game is high. For example, the first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and the second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. It may be provided so that the second game has a higher probability of being a second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of a second hit in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of a second hit in the second game may be configured to be 100%.

<First Example>
This embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology, and the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variation effect pattern (for example, a special effect pattern or a reach variation effect pattern) is selected, a button image (for example, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 or the lever 112). Alternatively, a lever image) is displayed on the screen to prompt the player to input an operation, and the display mode of the button image (or lever image) changes according to the operation of the effect button 109 (hereinafter, "button promotion effect"). The effect and the image using the operation means other than the effect button such as the lever 112 and the lever image are included in the concept of "button promotion effect" and "button image" when it is not necessary to collect and distinguish them. Execute (explained as). As the button image, a button image having a plurality of display modes, for example, a plurality of button images having different modes such as a color, a pattern, and a shape are prepared, and a big hit suggesting which color, pattern, and shape the button image is displayed. High expectations are different. The effect process of the button promotion effect in this embodiment is defined as a special effect pattern or a button promotion effect pattern which is one of the reach variation effect patterns. The button promotion effect pattern defines an effect process in which the jackpot expectation can be stepped up over multiple stages after the reach is established, and a button image for prompting the player to input the operation of the effect button 109 in each of the multiple stages of the effect. Is displayed. Operation input conditions related to the operation mode of the effect button 109 are defined as conditions for developing from one stage to the next stage or a big hit, and when there is an operation input that meets the conditions, the next stage of the effect or the big hit. It can develop to the point. In the case of describing "button effect" (or "button notice"), the effect being executed (effect display of the effect display device 60, sound effect of the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111) is accompanied by the operation of the effect button 109. The "button promotion effect" is also included in the "button effect" because it changes the button image displayed on the effect display device 60. In this embodiment (and the second and subsequent embodiments), when the "button promotion effect" is executed, most of them are accompanied by a sound effect and a light emission effect of the decorative lamp 111 (particularly the lamp of the effect button 109). Therefore, in the description in the following examples, the term "button effect" is also used in the "button promotion effect" unless necessary.

The conditions of the operation mode are determined in the form of the operation amount such as the number of operations of the effect button 109 and the continuous operation time, and the operation amount is determined so that the higher the jackpot expectation is for each type of the operation means image. However, the "operation amount" here may be an average value for each type of operation means image, and an exceptionally small amount of operation, for example, "one press" for a type with a relatively high expectation of a big hit. It may be a specification that a minimum operation amount such as the above may be given at random and infrequently as an operation mode condition.

Further, as an operation mode condition, the length of the valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 109 is further determined. As the length of the valid period of the effect button 109, a different time may be set depending on the amount of operation required of the player.

When a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the effect determining means 303 may select one from a plurality of types of button effect patterns as the special effect pattern. The button effect pattern defines an effect process that can develop over a plurality of effect stages. At each of the multiple production stages of the button effect pattern, which of the multiple types of button images is displayed suggests a high degree of expectation of a big hit, and each type of button image develops into the next effect. The operation input conditions to be satisfied for this purpose are defined in the button effect pattern.

FIG. 30 schematically shows a screen example when a button image appears on the screen in a button effect. FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b) illustrate the button image 500. In the effect based on the button effect pattern, the button image 500 appears in the substantially center of the screen as shown in FIG. 30A at each of the plurality of effect stages displayed after the reach is established. Around the button image 500, information suggesting the status of the valid period of the operation input is displayed as an operation input condition in the first related display area 502 below the button image 500, and the second above the button image 500. Information suggesting the status of the operation mode is displayed as an operation input condition in the related display area 504. In the lower right corner of the screen, the decorative pattern 506 is reduced and displayed in a variable manner. Along with the start of the button effect, a character string such as "Press the button three times in a row!" That guides the player to the operation input condition is displayed on the screen.

In the first related display area 502, a number or the like suggesting at least one of the elapsed time and the remaining time of the valid period of the operation input of the effect button 109 is displayed. For example, in the first related display area 502, the remaining time of the valid period of the operation input is displayed by characters such as "3 seconds left". As a modification, the elapsed time or the remaining time may be displayed in the form of an indicator (meter display or gauge display). The time display of the valid period displayed in the first related display area 502 does not necessarily have to display a number that exactly matches the valid period referred to in the internal control, and the valid period is displayed on the display. Anything that suggests time is enough. For example, the valid period of the effect button 109 may be started at a timing slightly before or after the timing at which the display of the valid period is started in the first related display area 502, and the valid period is "in the first related display area 502." The valid period of the effect button 109 may end at a timing slightly before or after the timing of "0 seconds".

In the second related display area 504, the operation status of the operation mode required of the player for the development to the next production stage or the change of the type of the operation means image (also referred to as “promotion”) is performed. It is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 109 by the player. For example, a numerical value indicating at least one of the elapsed operation amount of the effect button 109 (for example, the number of operations and the time) and the remaining operation amount (for example, the remaining number of times and the remaining time) is displayed. For example, as the operation status, numbers, characters or indicators (meter display and gauge display) such as "0 times", "1 time" and "2 times", and multiple objects composed of figures etc. (objects are operated once per operation). One object may be associated with each other, or the number of operations may be different depending on the mode of object display by different colors and shapes.) In the form of increasing the number of operations or decreasing the number of remaining operations. It is displayed in the second related display area 504.

When the effect button 109 is operated by the player, that is, when the effect button 109 is pressed, the effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. For example, when the button effect is composed of a battle effect in which an image of a friendly character and an enemy character fighting against each other is displayed, an image of attacking the enemy character is displayed each time the effect button 109 is operated. As the attack to be applied to the enemy character, the number of attacks corresponding to the operation amount of the effect button 109 may be displayed, or the type of attack according to the operation mode of the effect button 109 may be displayed.

FIG. 30B is an example of a screen one second after FIG. 30A, in which the button image 500 is displayed substantially in the center of the screen, and the reduced decorative symbol 506 is variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. In the first related display area 502, the remaining time of the valid period of the operation input is displayed in characters such as "2 seconds left". In the second related display area 504, the character "one more time" indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as the number of operations requested from the player. When the number of operations reaches a predetermined number or the number of remaining operations reaches "0 times", the type of the button image 500 may be switched to the button image 500 having a higher rank. For example, the button image 500 of the lowest first rank mode (eg, white button) is displayed first, and when the production stage is promoted to a higher stage, the higher second rank mode (eg, blue button) is displayed. It is switched to the button image 500 of the above, and when the production stage is promoted to a higher stage, it is switched to the button image 500 of the upper third rank mode (for example, the red button). Further, instead of switching to the button image 500 of the third rank aspect, the pattern is switched to the button image 500 of the higher fourth rank aspect (for example, a special button provided at the tip of the lever type operation member instead of the button). There may be. Further, the effect image is displayed so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the type of the button image 500 displayed at each effect stage.

When the button image 500 is promoted to a higher rank mode, a notice effect for stepping up may be displayed. In this case, the notice effect is, for example, a cut-in notice effect in which a specific special object is interrupted and displayed on the screen, or a comment notice effect in which one of a plurality of types of lines is displayed on the screen in the form of a character string. There may be. Since the number of operations required is larger when the rank of the button image 500 is promoted to a higher rank, the cumulative operation amount and time until the final effect is displayed through a plurality of stages may become redundant. Therefore, in order to reduce the redundancy by making the effect small, some kind of advance notice effect may be given each time the effect stage progresses, and the type of the advance notice effect generated at each effect stage may be changed. For example, in the first effect stage, a white normal button is displayed as the button image 500, and a comment notice effect is displayed. In the second effect stage, the blue button image 500 is displayed as the button image 500, and the cut-in notice effect is displayed. In the third effect stage, the red button image 500 is displayed as the button image 500, and the pass / fail branch effect indicating the pass / fail determination result is displayed.

As a modification, it may be determined that the higher the expectation of a big hit for each type of the button image 500, the different the operation mode is different from the operation amount. In this case, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the difficulty, complexity, and complexity of the operation mode may be. For example, in the first effect stage, the first operation mode (for example, one-shot push) is requested as an operation input condition, and the scene of a normal attack on an enemy character is displayed as the effect content. In the second effect stage, the second operation mode (for example, repeated hits) is requested as an operation input condition, and the scene of multiple attacks is displayed as the effect content in the form of a chase against an enemy character. In the third production stage, the third operation mode (for example, long press) is requested as an operation input condition, and the energy for performing the final special move is stored in the place where the enemy character is about to be defeated as the production content. A scene requesting a long press may be displayed. By requesting different operation modes such as the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode in each of the first to third production stages, the production can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

FIG. 31 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process in an example of the button effect. FIG. 31A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image 500. FIG. 31B shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the button effect. FIG. 31 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 31D shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the effect button 109, its length, the lighting color, or the lighting mode. FIG. 31 (e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 31 (f) shows an operation example of the effect button 109 and an operation mode thereof.

In the button effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), after the advance notice effect suggesting reach is executed during the "pre-reach notice" period of S900 and the reach is established, the "introduction effect" is performed. Period is set (S901). In the "introduction effect", in the button effect to be started from now on, if the player operates the button, the rank of the button image and the effect is promoted, and the effect of guiding the expectation of the big hit is executed. In "step 1" (S902), the effect of the first effect stage is executed, and in the effect, the first effective period (S911) of the effect button 109 is provided, and the effect is performed until the first effective period (S911) is reached. Button 109 has an invalid period (S910).

In the first valid period (S911), a character string of "press the button once!" And a white button image 500 requesting one press are displayed as an operation mode (S930), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is displayed. Is lit in white (S920). The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that the period is valid by its lighting, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a big hit. In the first related display area 502 of the button image 500, "one more second" is displayed as the remaining time of the valid period, and in the second related display area 504, "one more time" is displayed as the operation mode. When the effect button 109 is pressed once by the player in the first valid period (S911) and the operation input condition is satisfied (S940), the remaining number of times of the second related display area 504 changes to "0 times" and is valid. At the end of the period, "0 seconds" is displayed in the first related display area 502, and the lamp of the effect button 109 emits a flash like a flash (S921). After "Step 1", a branching effect of success or failure in the effect continuation that develops into the next effect stage is executed (S903), and if there is an operation input that satisfies the operation input condition in S940, "Still more! The effect of "step 2", which is the second effect stage, is executed together with the display of the character string indicating the continuation of the effect (S904). It can be replaced with the production of (not shown).

In "step 2" (S904), the effect of the second effect stage is executed, and the second valid period (S913) of the effect button 109 is provided in the effect. Since the operation input condition of the effect button 109 in the second effect stage has a larger operation amount than the operation input condition of the effect button 109 in the first effect stage, the second valid period (S913) is longer than the first effective period (S911). It is said that. The period from the first valid period (S911) to the second valid period (S913) is an invalid period (S912). In the second valid period (S913), the character string of "press the button three times in a row!" And the blue button image 500 requesting to be pressed three times as an operation mode are displayed (S931), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is displayed. Is lit in blue (S922), and a sound effect indicating that the emission color of the button image 500 and the effect button 109 has evolved from white to blue is output (S950). The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that the period is valid by its lighting, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a big hit. In the first related display area 502 of the button image 500, "3 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time of the valid period, and in the second related display area 504, "3 times" is displayed as the operation mode. When the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit by the player in the second valid period (S913) (S941), the characters in the second related display area 504 are "two more times", "one more time", and "0 more times" each time they are pressed. Is displayed so that the number of remaining times is reduced. In the first related display area 502, a decrease in the remaining time (countdown) such as "2 seconds left" and "1 second left" is displayed with the lapse of the valid period, and "0 seconds" is displayed with the end of the valid period. .. When the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit three times within the valid period and the operation input condition is satisfied, the lamp of the effect button 109 emits a flash like a flash (S923). After "step 2", a branch effect of success or failure in the effect continuation to develop to the next effect stage is executed (S905), and if there is an operation input satisfying the operation input condition in S941, "still continues". The effect of "step 3", which is the third effect stage, is executed together with the display of the character string indicating the continuation of the effect such as "!" (S906). If the operation input condition is not satisfied, it is replaced with another effect instead of the effect after the third effect stage (not shown).

In "step 3" (S906), the effect of the third effect stage is executed, and the effect button 109 is provided with the third valid period (S917) in the effect, but it is not specified on the screen before the third effective period. A short hidden validity period (S915) is provided as a trick or hidden function. During the hidden validity period (S915), the button image 500 is not displayed on the screen, but the lamp of the effect button 109 is secretly lit in white (S924), and the operation becomes effective when the player presses the effect button 109. It is a period. The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that it is in the valid period by its lighting. When the player presses the effect button 109 during the hidden validity period (S915), the effect lottery is executed with a probability according to the winning / failing judgment result, and the effect is displayed when the effect execution pattern suggesting the jackpot expectation is won. For example, in the case of a big hit, a production with a high expectation of a big hit may be executed with a high probability. The effects with high expectation of big hits are, for example, a cut-in notice effect in which a specific special object is displayed by interrupting the screen, an effect in which the effect button 109 is changed in multiple colors such as rainbow colors, and a special effect. It is a production that outputs sound. The hidden effective period (S915) is provided at a timing that does not overlap with the first to third effective periods, thereby avoiding complication of the effect control. The period from after the second valid period (S913) to before the hidden valid period (S915) is an invalid period (S914). The execution pattern of the hidden button may be determined by lottery in advance not only when the button is pressed but also when the fluctuation starts.

Since the operation input condition of the effect button 109 in the third effect stage has a larger operation amount than the operation input condition of the effect button 109 in the second effect stage, the third valid period (S917) is longer than the second effective period (S913). It is said that. The period from after the hidden validity period (S915) to before the third validity period (S917) is the invalid period (S916). In the third valid period (S917), the character string of "10 consecutive hits of the button!" And the red button image 500 are displayed as the operation mode, and the countdown display of the remaining time of the valid period starts. At the same time (S932), the lamp of the effect button 109 is turned on in red (S925), and a sound effect indicating that the emission color of the button image 500 and the effect button 109 has evolved from blue to red is output (S951). The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that the period is valid by its lighting, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a big hit. In the first related display area 502 of the button image 500, "5 seconds left" is displayed as the remaining time of the valid period, and in the second related display area 504, "10 more times" is displayed as the operation mode. When the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit by the player in the third valid period (S917) (S942), the characters in the second related display area 504 are "9 more times", "8 more times", and "7 more times" each time they are pressed. Is displayed so that the remaining number of times decreases. In the first related display area 502, a decrease in the remaining time (countdown) such as "2 seconds left" and "1 second left" is displayed with the lapse of the valid period, and "0 seconds" is displayed with the end of the valid period. .. When the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit 10 times within the valid period and the operation input condition is satisfied, the lamp of the effect button 109 emits light while changing in multiple colors such as a rainbow (S926). After "step 3", a branch effect of whether the hit / fail determination result is a big hit or a miss is executed (S907), and the big hit or the miss is displayed. During the branch effect (S907), the effect button 109 is in the invalid period (S918).

If no operation input is made by the player during the valid period of the operation for the effect button 109 in the predetermined effect stage, the process does not proceed to the next effect stage. In that case, the execution of the button effect after the next effect stage is omitted, and the rest of the period is replaced with an alternative effect. As an alternative effect, there is no display of the button image 500, and there is no development of the effect, that is, an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the button effect is composed of a battle effect, a step-up advance notice effect (for example, a cut-in advance notice effect) in which the ally character becomes dominant as the effect stage progresses due to the operation of the effect button 109 by the player is executed. On the other hand, if there is no operation of the effect button 109, an effect that the ally character and the enemy character are in competition and cannot win or lose is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image 500 and the step-up notice effect are displayed as they are. It leads to the final success / failure branching effect without being done. Further, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or switched to an effect of re-variating.

Although there was an operation input itself by the player during the valid period of the effect button 109, if the operation input does not satisfy the operation input condition, the button effect is continued, but the type of the button image 500 is the type of the higher rank. It is replaced with an effect in which the button image 500 of the same type is displayed without being promoted to and without displaying the step-up notice effect. The case where the operation input condition is not satisfied is, for example, a case where the player is required to input 10 times within 5 seconds and only 1 to 9 times are input within the valid period. As a modification, when the operation input does not satisfy the operation input condition, the button effect after the next effect stage may be omitted and replaced with an alternative effect as in the case where there is no operation input.

In the example of this figure, the branch effect of each step (each effect of S903, S905, S907, each button lamp effect of S921, S923, S926, etc.) is an operation input condition when the valid period elapses (at the end). However, if the operation input condition is satisfied during the valid period, the branch effect may be started immediately. In this case, the start time of the branch effect will be shifted to the front, but it is preferable to configure it so that the effect timings after step 2 are matched by continuing the display of the result notification screen of the branch effect for a long time (step). The more you win the special effect pattern, the larger the difference between the variable display time of the special symbol and the execution time of the effect will be if the execution time of the branch effect shifts to the front by multiple button effects.) ..

FIG. 32 is a diagram of a table showing a plurality of types of effect patterns in which combinations of types of button images to be displayed in the button effect are defined. In this figure, six types of effect patterns are illustrated, and "1" to "6" are assigned as pattern IDs.

In the effect pattern with the pattern ID "1", the white button image 500, which is the first rank, is displayed in the first effect stage, but the effect does not develop after the second effect stage, and the button image 500 is promoted. It is stipulated that it will end with no display. The effect pattern of the pattern ID "1" is selected according to the variation pattern which is the length of the variation time at which the effect ends in the first effect stage.

In the effect pattern of the pattern ID "2", the white button image 500 which is the first rank is displayed in the first effect stage, and is promoted to the blue button image 500 which is the second rank in the second effect stage. It is stipulated that the production does not develop at the 3 production stage and ends without promotion or display of the button image 500.

In the effect pattern of the pattern ID "3", the blue button image 500 which is the second rank is displayed from the first effect stage, and the blue button image 500 which is the same second rank is displayed in the second effect stage. , It is stipulated that the production does not develop in the third production stage and ends without promotion or display of the button image 500. The effect patterns of the pattern IDs "2" and "3" are selected according to the variation pattern which is the length of the variation time at which the effect ends in the second effect stage.

In the effect pattern of the pattern ID "4", the white button image 500 which is the first rank is displayed in the first effect stage, and is promoted to the blue button image 500 which is the second rank in the second effect stage. At the production stage, it is determined to be promoted to the red button image 500, which is the third rank.

In the effect pattern of the pattern ID "5", the blue button image 500 which is the second rank is displayed from the first effect stage, and the blue button image 500 which is the same second rank is displayed in the second effect stage as well. At the 3rd stage, it is determined that the image is promoted to the red button image 500, which is the third rank.

In the effect pattern of the pattern ID "6", the white button image 500 which is the first rank is displayed in the first effect stage, and is promoted to the blue button image 500 which is the second rank in the second effect stage. At the production stage, it is stipulated that the red button image 500, which is the third rank, will be specially promoted. Special promotion means that after pretending that the button image 500 ends without being promoted from the second production stage, a production that rewinds the production of the second production stage, for example, a production that reverse-plays at high speed is displayed and then renewed. This is an effect in which the button image 500 is promoted to the red button image 500 which is the third rank or the button image 500 of the lever type operation member which is the fourth rank in the third effect stage after the sequential reproduction. The effect patterns of the pattern IDs "4" to "6" are selected according to the variation pattern which is the length of the variation time that can be developed up to the third effect stage.

The effect determining means 303 determines one of the plurality of types of effect patterns, and then determines each operation input condition from the first effect stage to the third effect stage according to the pattern ID of the effect pattern. Further, when the pattern IDs "2" to "6" are selected, if the effect button 109 is not operated in the first effect stage, the pattern ID "1" can be replaced with the effect pattern from the second effect stage onward. The button effect of is not executed. Similarly, when the pattern IDs "4" to "6" are selected, if the effect button 109 is not operated in the second effect stage, the pattern ID "2" or "3" can be replaced with the effect pattern. The button effect in the third effect stage may not be executed. As a modification, any of the effect pattern that ends up to the first effect stage, the effect pattern that ends up to the second effect stage, and the effect pattern that develops up to the third effect stage may be defined as a common effect pattern. In that case, regardless of the length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, select any of the pattern IDs "4" to "6", and if it ends by the first production stage, refer to the first production stage. Then, the rest may be omitted, and if the process ends up to the second effect stage, the rest may be omitted by referring to the second effect stage.

As a modification, at the stage where a large number of operations are required as normal operation input conditions as in the third effect stage (final stage in the example of this figure), the second related display area 504 is said to be "10 more times". Instead of clearly indicating the number, the number of times may be intentionally obscured by an ambiguous word such as "repeated hits!". In this case, one operation is requested in the first production stage, and four or more operations are requested in the third production stage from the estimation based on the flow in which three operations are requested in the second production stage. While making the player imagine that it is, the special operation input condition that the big hit is actually confirmed by one operation makes it possible to produce an unexpected effect.

As a modification, when a plurality of button effects are simultaneously executed in a plurality of effect display areas instead of the effect display area of one effect display device 60, the button effects of the present embodiment are executed in parallel with each area. May be displayed and the process may be performed at the same time. The plurality of effect display areas referred to here may be a plurality of effect display devices such as a combination of a main liquid crystal display and a sub liquid crystal display, or a plurality of effect display devices may be divided into display areas of one effect display device 60. It may be the case that the area is provided. In these cases, the button image 500 is displayed in each of the plurality of effect display areas, the operation mode and the valid period are displayed as the operation input conditions, and the plurality of button images 500 are operated by the player once. An effect of promoting the type of button image or a step-up notice effect may be displayed in parallel for all of the above. However, in the case of displaying in two effect display areas, if the operation of the effect button 109 in one effect display area satisfies the operation input condition and the type of the button image 500 is promoted, that button is used. The validity period of the effect button 109 may be temporarily stopped in the other effect display area in order to draw the player's attention to the effect displayed in response to the operation and to avoid duplicate control of the effect. That is, it is a process of temporarily switching the valid period of the effect button 109 to the invalid period, controlling the return to the valid period after a predetermined time has elapsed, and continuing to display the number of subsequent operations.

As a modification, when the button image 500 of the type with high expectation of big hit (for example, the type of the second rank or higher) is displayed from the first production stage, it means that the development from the second production stage to the subsequent stage is confirmed. It may be represented. In this case, it may be suggested that the button image 500 is promoted to a rank (third rank or higher) having a higher expectation of a big hit by operating the effect button 109 in the first effect stage. Further, the button image 500 one lower than the highest rank is displayed from the first effect stage, and if the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the button effect promoted to the highest rank button image 500 may be executed in the third effect stage. There may be.

Further, as another modification, an effect of suggesting a set value may be executed using the area of the second related display area 504 (operation number display). For example, in the case of an operation pattern in which the remaining number of operations is 10 or more, in the period from "remaining 6 times" to "remaining 4 times", the effect button 109 is operated twice for each decrease in the number of remaining operations, that is, the effect. By configuring the button 109 to reduce the number of remaining operations by 1 every time the button 109 is operated (therefore, the operation period for 10 productions is effectively 13 operation periods), the set value is set to "4". It may be suggested that the setting is as high as "6". Alternatively, it is possible to suggest the set value by configuring to change the character color, font, etc. of the remaining number of numbers (for example, displaying gold characters) when a specific number of times such as "6 times remaining" is reached. It may be configured.

<Second Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first embodiment, and the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. The player is urged to input an operation, and an effect in which the display mode of the button image changes according to the operation of the effect button 109 is executed. As the button image, a plurality of types of button images having different display modes such as colors, patterns, and shapes are prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by which color, pattern, and shape of the button image is displayed. The height of is different. The special effect pattern in this embodiment is divided into a first special effect pattern and a second special effect pattern, and in any of the special effect patterns, first, a type of button image having a relatively low expectation of a big hit is displayed. Therefore, it is determined that the subsequent production is executed according to the operation by the player. In the first special effect pattern, after a button image of a type with a relatively low expectation of a big hit is displayed, a normal advance notice effect is executed when the button operation is performed within the valid period of the effect button 109. In the second special effect pattern, after a button image of a type with a relatively low expectation of a big hit is displayed, a type with a relatively high expectation of a big hit when a button operation is performed within the valid period of the effect button 109. The promotion to the button image is displayed, and then the promoted button image is saved to the edge of the screen or the corner of the screen. The saved button image is used in a later production, and also has a role of notifying that a production with a high expectation of a big hit will be executed in the later production.

The effect determining means 303 selects one from a plurality of types of special effect patterns when the variation pattern of the variation time corresponding to the special effect pattern is selected. When the first special effect pattern is selected as the special effect pattern, the effect determining means 303 selects the type of the button image to be displayed in the button effect from a plurality of types, and selects the content of the normal advance notice effect from the plurality of types. .. When the second special effect pattern is selected as the special effect pattern, the effect determining means 303 selects the type of the first button image to be displayed first in the button effect from a plurality of types, and displays the image after the rank of the button image is promoted. 2nd button Select the type of image from multiple types. In addition, the effect content to be displayed in the effect based on the second special effect pattern is selected from a plurality of types of content. The effect display control means 305 executes an effect based on the first special effect pattern when the first special effect pattern is selected. When the second special effect pattern is selected, the effect display control means 305 executes the effect based on the second special effect pattern.

FIG. 33 schematically shows a screen transition example of the first button effect in the second embodiment. In the effect based on the first special effect pattern, a character string prompting the player to operate the effect button 109, such as the button image 500 and "press the button!", Is displayed as in the first screen 510. After that, if the effect button 109 is pressed within the valid period of the effect button 109, a comment notice 515 with a character string such as "Darkness ..." is displayed as a normal notice effect as in the second screen 511. Let me. The comment notice effect is a notice effect that suggests a high degree of expectation of a big hit by displaying one of a plurality of types of lines on the screen in the form of a character string.

On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is not operated within the valid period of the effect button 109 on the first screen 510, the comment notice 515 is not displayed and the development of the effect is not displayed as in the third screen 512. In this case, as an alternative effect, for example, in the case of a battle effect, an effect may be displayed in which the process in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character competes and is not settled is displayed.

FIG. 34 schematically shows a screen transition example of the second button effect in the second embodiment. In the effect based on the second special effect pattern, a character string prompting the player to operate the effect button 109, such as the first button image 530 and "press the button!", Is displayed as in the first screen 520. After that, when the effect button 109 is pressed within the valid period of the effect button 109, the comment notice 516 having the same appearance as the comment notice 515 of FIG. 33 is momentarily displayed and the first is displayed as shown in the second screen 521. The comment notice 516 is deleted by pretending to be a production based on a special production pattern. Then, a promotion effect of displaying a second button image 531 having a color different from that of the first button image 530, such as the third screen 522, and displaying a promotion mark 535 by a character string such as "button promotion!" Is executed. .. The promotion effect is an effect of switching the type of the first button image 530 being displayed to the second button image 531 of the higher rank type and displaying it, suggesting that the jackpot expectation is further increased. That is, the player thinks that the normal effect is displayed by first displaying the first button image 530, which is the same as the button image 500 of the first special effect pattern, and the comment notice 516, which is the same as the comment notice 515. However, it is possible to express that the expectation of a big hit has increased by displaying a production different from the normal production. It is configured so that it cannot be determined whether the first special effect pattern or the second special effect pattern is displayed only by the types of the button image 500 and the first button image 530 displayed first. Similarly, it is configured so that it cannot be determined whether the first special effect pattern or the second special effect pattern is displayed only by the types of the comment notice 515 and the comment notice 516. Although the comment notice 516 in this figure illustrates the same lines as the comment notice 515 in FIG. 33, another line may be selected and displayed. The second button image 531 of the "higher rank" type is used as an image display indicating that the operation input of the operating means is in the valid period during the valid period when the later button effect is executed. .. Further, it is an image suggesting that when a condition for switching the effect is satisfied, such as when an operation input is made in a later button effect, a notice effect display having a relatively high expectation of a big hit is executed. Further, the second button image 531 may be the same as the first button image 530, or may be configured to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit by additionally adding a character image or a character string display. ..

After the third screen 522, on the fourth screen 523, the second button image 531 is displayed as the third button image 532 whose size is reduced and retracted to the edge of the screen. The third button image 532 moved to the edge of the screen is left in that position until the subsequent production. By placing the third button image 532 in the corner of the screen in this way, it can be suggested that the chance is taken over to the subsequent production, and the production with high expectation for big hits continues. The deferred third button image 532 may be used in a subsequent effect within the same symbol variation, or may be used in a subsequent effect within the next symbol variation. In the subsequent effect, the promotion effect in which the type of the first button image 530 is promoted may be executed as in the third screen 522 and accumulated at the edge of the screen as in the third button image 532, or the subsequent effect may be performed. Each time it is executed, the rank of the 3rd button image 532 is further promoted, or an image of the same system as the notice that generated the button image based on the occurrence of a high expectation notice (red cut-in) in the subsequent production. It may be configured to be promoted to (red button image).

In the effect based on the second special effect pattern of the present embodiment, when the effect button 109 is operated on the first screen 520, the normal advance notice effect is momentarily displayed on the second screen 521, or the normal advance notice effect is produced. Is specified to execute the promotion effect while displaying. In the effect based on the second special effect pattern in the modified example, when the effect button 109 is operated on the first screen 520, the promotion effect after the second screen 521 is not displayed on the second screen 521. It may be a specification to execute. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the promotion effect is executed with an appearance similar to the normal notice effect. For example, an effect having an appearance similar to the comment notice is displayed, and when the player presses the effect button 109, the promotion effect is displayed. The specifications may be such that.

On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is not operated within the valid period of the effect button 109 on the first screen 520, neither the comment notice 515 nor the promotion effect is displayed as in the fourth screen 523, and the development of the effect is not displayed. .. In this case, as an alternative effect, for example, in the case of a battle effect, an effect process in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character competes with each other and cannot be settled may be displayed.

When the effect based on the second special effect pattern is executed, the effect based on the second special effect pattern may be continuously executed in the subsequent variable effect. For example, when the player operates the effect button 109, the effect based on the next second special effect pattern is executed with the third button image 532 retracted to the edge of the screen together with the promotion effect, and the player similarly performs the effect. The third button image 532 is accumulated (stocked) at the edge of the screen according to the operation of the effect button 109, or the accumulated third button image 532 is converted into a higher rank image (accumulation button image promotion). For example, when the pre-judgment result corresponding to the symbol variation with high jackpot expectation is included in the reserved memory, or when the total of the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit of eight. , The effect based on the second special effect pattern is continuously repeated in a plurality of symbol variation effects up to the symbol variation corresponding to the winning / failing lottery value corresponding to the big hit.

On the other hand, only when the player operates the effect button 109 in the effect based on the second special effect pattern, the effect based on the second special effect pattern is continuously executed or accumulated in the subsequent effect. It is also possible to execute an effect using the third button image 532. For example, immediately before the start of the subsequent effect, the subsequent effect is determined by referring to different effect pattern tables depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button 109 in the preceding effect. Even though the button image was not accumulated in the preceding effect, if the effect that presupposes the accumulation of the button image or the effect with a relatively high expectation of big hit is executed in the subsequent effect, the presence or absence of the button image accumulation This is because the expected degree of big hit of the subsequent production does not match, and the correspondence between the content of the production and the expected degree of big hit may be broken. When the player operates the effect button 109 in the preceding effect and the third button image 532 is accumulated, the subsequent effect is, for example, the accumulated third button if it is a symbol variation effect corresponding to a big hit. The image 532 is used to select an effect of inciting the presence or absence of a big hit, and if it is a symbol variation effect that does not correspond to a big hit, a button effect that can accumulate the third button image 532 is further selected.

In this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the effect is determined by referring to different effect pattern tables depending on whether or not the effect button 109 is operated or whether or not the button image is accumulated in the preceding effect. In the modified example, the combination of the following (1) to (5) is determined in advance regardless of whether the effect button 109 is operated or the button image is accumulated in the preceding effect, and the effect button 109 is operated. However, it may be possible to execute the production even if it is not operated. That is, as a specification in which when the first special effect pattern or the second special effect pattern is determined, the effect content when the effect button 109 is operated and the effect content when the effect button 109 is not operated are determined in advance. May be good. The decision contents in that case are displayed as, for example, (1) whether or not to promote the rank of the button image (that is, whether it is a comment notice or a promotion effect), and (2) normal notice contents (for example, a comment notice). Contents, (3) Rank when promoting the rank of the button image, that is, the type of button image to be displayed after promotion, (4) Displayed in the later button effect when the player presses the effect button 109 within the valid period. The combination of the content of the effect at the time of promotion to be promoted and (5) the content of the effect at the time of non-promotion to be displayed in the later button effect when the player does not press the effect button 109 within the valid period are collectively determined. You may. Based on this determination content, the effect determination means 303 selects and executes the effect content according to whether or not the actual effect button 109 is operated.

As described above, in the promotion effect, there are eight cases where the pre-judgment result corresponding to the symbol change with high expectation of big hit is included in the reserved memory, or the total of the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the upper limit value. When becomes, it may be configured to be executed in the variation effect up to the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit. For example, if a button effect that can be replaced with a promotion effect is determined in at least one of one or more variation effects executed before the symbol variation with high jackpot expectation, the promotion effect in the variation effect. May be executed. In addition, if the button effect that can be replaced with the promotion effect is not decided, the promotion effect can be forcibly replaced by the change effect immediately before the symbol change with high jackpot expectation, or the symbol change with high jackpot expectation can be changed. It may be adjusted to execute the promotion effect inside. However, if the promotion effect cannot be executed even in the pattern fluctuation with high expectation of big hit, the promotion effect may not be executed. In addition, during the period in which a special fluctuation pattern that shifts when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times from the execution of the special game is selected (special fluctuation pattern table reference period), promotion is made across multiple fluctuations. The effect may be executed once or a plurality of times, and a variable effect pattern may be executed in which the button effect is performed using the accumulated third button image 532 in the deviation variation after the period or the jackpot variation during the period. .. The period in which a special variation pattern is selected is not one special variation pattern table reference period, but is composed of a plurality of special variation pattern table reference periods, and a plurality of periods in which promotion effects are selected are consecutive. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 35 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process in one example of the button effect of the second embodiment. FIG. 35A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 35B shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the button effect. FIG. 35 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 35D shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the effect button 109, its length, the lighting color, or the lighting mode. FIG. 35 (e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 35 (f) shows the operation timing of the effect button 109.

In the button effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the advance notice effect suggesting the occurrence of reach during the "pre-reach notice" period of S960, and the first button effect "button" during that period. "Direction 1" (S961) is executed, "Button effect 2" (S963), which is the second button effect, is executed after "Pre-reach notice" (S960), and then "Reach effect" (S965) is executed. Will be done. After the "reach effect" (S965), the third button effect "button effect 3" (S966) is executed, and the pass / fail branch (S967) is executed.

In the "button effect 1" (S961), the first valid period (S971) of the effect button 109 is provided after the character string "press the button!" Requesting the press of the effect button 109 is displayed. Before the first valid period (S971), the effect button 109 has an invalid period (S970). In the first valid period, the white first button image 530 is displayed (S990), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is turned on in white (S980). The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that the effect period of the effect button 109 is valid by its lighting, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a big hit. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player during the first valid period (S971) (S1000), a sound effect is output (S1010), and the white first button image 530 becomes the blue second button image 531. It is "promoted" (S962), the second button image 531 is reduced and saved, and is stocked at the edge of the screen as the third button image 532 (S991).

In the "button effect 2" (S963), a second valid period (S973) of the effect button 109 is provided after the character string "press the button!" Requesting the press of the effect button 109 is displayed. The period from the first valid period (S971) to the second valid period (S973) is an invalid period (S972). Immediately before the second valid period (S973), a period for blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 is provided (S981), and a sound effect is output during that period (S1011). Immediately after that (second valid period, S973), the lamp blinking and the sound effect of the effect button 109 inform the player that the operation input of the effect button 109 becomes effective. In the second valid period (S973), the blue button image stocked at the edge of the screen in S991 is enlarged and displayed (S992), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is lit in blue (S982). When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player in the second valid period (S973) (S1001), a sound effect is output (S1012), and the blue button image is "promoted" to the red button image (S964). Then, the red button image is reduced and saved and stocked at the edge of the screen (S993). After "promotion" (S964), "reach production" is executed (S965).

In the "button effect 3" (S966), a third valid period (S975) of the effect button 109 is provided after the character string "press the button!" Requesting the press of the effect button 109 is displayed. The period from the second valid period (S973) to the third valid period (S975) is an invalid period (S974). Immediately before the third valid period (S975), a period for blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 is also provided (S983), and a sound effect is output during that period (S1013). Immediately after that (third valid period, S975), the lamp blinking and the sound effect of the effect button 109 inform the player that the operation input of the effect button 109 becomes effective. In the third valid period (S975), the red button image stocked at the edge of the screen in S993 is enlarged and displayed (S994), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is lit in red (S984). When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player in the third valid period (S975) (S1002), a sound effect is output (S1014), and as a success / failure branch effect, an effect that incites whether the effect is a big hit or a miss is generated. It is executed (S967). During the pass / fail branch effect, the effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S976).

If no operation input is made by the player in the first valid period (S971) and the second valid period (S973), the promotion or stock of the button image is not displayed. In that case, the subsequent execution of the button effect is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative effect. As an alternative effect, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the effect, that is, an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the button effect is composed of a battle effect, if there is no operation of the effect button 109, the effect that the ally character and the enemy character are in competition and cannot win or lose is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image is displayed as it is. Or, the final success / failure branch effect is reached without displaying the button effect. Further, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or switched to an effect of re-variating.

In the example of FIG. 35, in the "button effect 2" and the "button effect 3", the effect is executed using the button images stocked up to that point, but in the modified example, the button image is used in these series of effects. It may be configured to execute the effect without using. In the case of sandwiching an effect that does not use the button image in this way, the player mistakenly recognizes that the same button image was displayed without promotion even though the player pressed the effect button 109 and aimed to promote the button image. There is a possibility that it will be done. Therefore, immediately before using the stocked button image in the production, the lamp of the production button 109 is blinked in S981 and S983, and the sound effect is output in S1011 and S1013 to emphasize the use of the button image in the production. ing.

As a modification, the button image stocked in S991 or S993 is changed to circulate in multiple colors such as white, blue, and red so that the player cannot easily identify which color was stocked. It may be displayed at the edge of the screen, or only the outline or outline of a button that is not colored like a silhouette may be displayed at the edge of the screen.

As another modification, a case may be included in which not only a single press of the effect button 109 but also a "continuous hit" in which the effect button 109 is pressed continuously a plurality of times and a "long press" in which the press is held for a certain period of time are requested from the player. ..

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the button image is "retracted" and displayed when there is a button operation in the button effect, but as another modification, the position of the button image is not changed and the button image is displayed. Is promoted (or the equivalent button image is maintained) and is put on standby on the spot, and the characters "LOCK" and "HOLD" are added and displayed, and the button image is fixed with the "chain" image. By displaying the button image as if it were fixed, the button image may be configured to wait until the timing of the subsequent button effect.

<Third Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technique, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment, and the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. The player is urged to input an operation, and an effect in which the display mode of the button image changes according to the operation of the effect button 109 is executed. As the button image, a plurality of types of button images having different display modes such as colors, patterns, and shapes are prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by which color, pattern, and shape of the button image is displayed. The height of is different. The special effect pattern in this embodiment is a third special effect pattern, which is positioned as a modification to the first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern in the second embodiment. That is, when a normal operation, for example, a single press is performed on the effect button 109 for which an operation input is urged in the button effect, the first special effect pattern or the second special effect pattern of the second embodiment is performed. In addition, comment notice and promotion production will be executed. On the other hand, when a specific type of button image with a relatively high jackpot expectation is displayed, if an operation different from normal, for example, long press is continued, the button image is reduced and saved to the edge of the screen and stocked. If you stop pressing and holding the button in the subsequent production to release the stock, the stocked high-expectation button image can be used in the subsequent production. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the button image of the predetermined jackpot expectation degree is displayed, the player can optionally stock the button image in the subsequent production. For example, when a button image with a high degree of expectation appears, the player does not use the degree of expectation of the button image on the spot, holds it until the final hit / fail branch effect, and at that timing, the degree of expectation of the button image. Can be used. That is, a player who thinks that it is preferable to use a button image with a high degree of expectation after reaching the reach rather than using it before the reach comes out may stock the button image and use it later.

The effect determining means 303 selects one from a plurality of types of special effect patterns when the variation pattern of the variation time corresponding to the special effect pattern is selected. When the third special effect pattern is selected as the special effect pattern, the effect determining means 303 selects the type of the button image to be displayed first in the button effect from a plurality of types, and in the effect based on the third special effect pattern. Select the effect content to be displayed from multiple types of content. The effect display control means 305 executes an effect based on the third special effect pattern when the third special effect pattern is selected.

FIG. 36 schematically shows a screen transition example of the button effect in the third embodiment. In the effect based on the third special effect pattern, a character string prompting the player to operate the effect button 109, such as the first button image 550 and "press the button!", Is displayed as in the first screen 540. After that, if the effect button 109 is pressed once within the valid period of the effect button 109, a comment notice 517 with a character string such as "Darkness ..." as a normal notice effect as shown in the second screen 541. Is displayed. The comment notice effect is a notice effect that suggests a high degree of expectation of a big hit by displaying one of a plurality of types of lines on the screen in the form of a character string.

On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is not operated within the valid period of the effect button 109 on the first screen 540, the comment notice 517 is not displayed and the development of the effect is not displayed as in the sixth screen 545. In this case, as an alternative effect, for example, in the case of a battle effect, an effect may be displayed in which the process in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character competes and is not settled is displayed.

If the first button image 550 displayed on the first screen 540 is a type with a relatively high expectation of a big hit, for example, a red button image, and the effect button 109 is pressed and held within the valid period, the effect button 109 is pressed and held. Like the third screen 542, the first button image 550 is reduced and stocked in the form of a red second button image 551 saved at the edge of the screen. At this time, the character string 549 indicating that the button image can be stocked is displayed on the screen even before the start of the valid period. This is because the validity period is not a long time, so that the character string 549 is displayed early so that even if the player starts to press and hold the character string 549 after reading the character string 549, the character string 549 is displayed early. Furthermore, before displaying the character string 549, an effect display that is a precursor to the character string 549 is displayed on the screen, suggesting that the character string 549 will be displayed from now on and that the button image can be stocked. May be good. The stock of the second button image 551 is deferred to the edge of the screen while the effect button 109 is pressed and held. By deferring the second button image 551 with a high expectation of a big hit in the corner of the screen in this way, it can be suggested that the chance is taken over to the subsequent production and the production with a high expectation of a big hit continues. Further, it is clearly shown in the appearance that the subsequent effect can be switched depending on whether the button image is stocked by the player (third screen 542) or not (second screen 541).

When the player releases the long press of the effect button 109 when the white third button image 552, which has a relatively low expectation of a big hit, is displayed in the subsequent button effect as in the fourth screen 543, the first button effect is displayed. As in the 5 screen 544, the red second button image 551 is enlarged and replaced with the third button image 552 and displayed as the fourth button image 553. Here, by pressing the effect button 109 of a color having a relatively high expectation, the player can increase the expectation that a big hit will occur in the subsequent effect, for example, the pass / fail branch effect. For example, when the battle effect is displayed on the 4th screen 543, the scene where the ally character wins the enemy character is displayed, while if the button image is not stocked, a big hit is produced by another effect. You may.

FIG. 37 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process in one example of the button effect of the third embodiment. FIG. 37A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 37B shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the button effect. FIG. 37 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 37D shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the effect button 109, its length, the lighting color, or the lighting mode. FIG. 37 (e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 37 (f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the effect button 109.

In the button effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the advance notice effect suggesting the occurrence of reach during the "pre-reach notice" period of S1020, and the first button effect "button" during that period. The effect 1 (S1021) is executed, the second button effect "button effect 2" (S1023) is executed after the "pre-reach notice" (S1020), and then the "reach effect" (S1025) is executed. Will be done. After the "reach effect" (S1025), the third button effect "button effect 3" (S1026) is executed, and the pass / fail branch (S1027) is executed.

In the "button effect 1" (S1021), the first valid period (S1031) of the effect button 109 is provided after the character string "press the button!" Requesting the press of the effect button 109 is displayed. Before the first valid period (S1031), the effect button 109 is in the invalid period (S1030). In the first valid period, the white button image is displayed (S1050), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is turned on in white (S1040). The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that the effect period of the effect button 109 is valid by its lighting, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a big hit. When the effect button 109 is pressed once by the player in the first valid period (S1031) (S1060), a sound effect is output (S1070) and a comment notice is displayed (S1022).

In the "button effect 2" (S1023), a second valid period (S1033) of the effect button 109 is provided after the character string "press the button!" Requesting the press of the effect button 109 is displayed. The period from the first valid period (S1031) to the second valid period (S1033) is an invalid period (S1032). In the second valid period (S1033), the red button image is displayed (S1051), and the lamp of the effect button 109 blinks in red (S1041). Here, the lamp of the effect button 109 is "blinking" instead of the usual "lighting", which suggests that the effect button 109 can be pressed not only once but also for a long time. When the player presses the effect button 109 once in the second valid period (S1033) (S1061), the lamp of the effect button 109 emits a flash like a flash (S1042), and a sound effect is output (S1042). S1071), a comment notice is displayed (S1024). On the other hand, when the player presses and holds the effect button 109 in the second valid period (S1033) (S1061), a sound effect is output (S1071), and the red button image is reduced and saved, and the game is played. As long as the person keeps pressing and holding the effect button 109, it will continue to be stocked at the edge of the screen (S1052). After that, the "reach effect" is executed (S1025), and if the player stops pressing and holding the effect button 109 during that time, the stock red button image disappears.

In the "button effect 3" (S1026), after the white button image is displayed (S1053) together with the character string "press the button!" Requesting the effect button 109 to be pressed, the third valid period of the effect button 109. (S1035) is provided. The third validity period is the last validity period before the success / failure branch effect, and even if the button image can be stocked even in this period, there is no opportunity to release the stock later and use it for the subsequent production. , The specifications are such that stock will not be accepted during the third validity period. The period from the second valid period (S1033) to the third valid period (S1035) is an invalid period (S1034). Immediately before the third valid period (S1035), a period for blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 is provided (S1043), and a sound effect is output during that period (S1072). The blinking lamp and the sound effect of the effect button 109 suggest that it is possible to replace the displayed white button image with the stock button image by releasing the long press of the effect button 109. Here, when the player releases the long press of the effect button 109, the red button image stocked at the edge of the screen is enlarged and replaced with the white button image (S1054) in the third valid period (S1035). The lamp of the effect button 109 is lit in red (S1044). When the effect button 109 is pressed once by the player in the third valid period (S1035) (S1062), a sound effect is output (S1073), and the effect of inciting whether the effect is a big hit or a miss as a pass / fail branch effect. Is executed (S1027). During the pass / fail branch effect, the effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1036). In this way, the button image stocked by any of the button effects is specified so that it can be released from stock and used for the effect during the final validity period.

If no operation input is made by the player in the first valid period (S1031) and the second valid period (S1033), the promotion or stock of the button image is not displayed. In that case, the subsequent execution of the button effect is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative effect. As an alternative effect, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the effect, that is, an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the button effect is composed of a battle effect, if there is no operation of the effect button 109, the effect that the ally character and the enemy character are in competition and cannot win or lose is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image is displayed as it is. Or, the final success / failure branch effect is reached without displaying the button effect. Further, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or switched to an effect of re-variating.

In addition, in order to determine whether the operation mode of the effect button 109 by the player is a single press or a long press, it is not determined at the timing when the signal indicating the operation on (press) of the effect button 109 rises high. , The determination is not made until a predetermined time, for example, 0.2 seconds has elapsed from the rise. Then, if the signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 109 is turned on (pressed) falls low (or if it falls) between 0.2 seconds and 0.5 seconds after the rise, the fall timing (or the fall timing). Or, if the operation is still on (pressed) even after 0.5 seconds have passed, it is determined that it is a "single push" (at the timing 0.2 seconds later), and at that timing (0.5 seconds after the rise). Judged as "long press". However, in order to simplify the distinction between the two, as an instruction to stock the button image, another operation means, for example, the cross key 110 may be pressed instead of the effect button 109. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an operation based on the rising edge of the signal indicating ON (pressing).

In this way, when the effect button 109 is pressed and held while a specific type of button image having a relatively high expectation is displayed, the button image is stocked at the edge of the screen. On the other hand, even if the effect button 109 is pressed and held while a button image other than a specific type, for example, a button image of a type with a relatively low expectation is displayed, the button image is not stocked, but in the modified example, the button image is not stocked. Regardless of the type of, the button image may be stocked by pressing and holding. Alternatively, if a button image other than a specific type is displayed and the button image is long-pressed, the reaction to the long-press is different from that of a normal single-shot press, for example, the color is changed to a different color or different from the normal one. You may output a sound effect.

Further, in this embodiment, by stocking a button image with a relatively high jackpot expectation and using it in a later button effect, the button image displayed in the later button effect is promoted to a stock image. Although it is possible, in the later button effect, the button image displayed at the beginning may be configured to be a button image having a jackpot expectation equal to or higher than the stocked button image. With this configuration, for example, when the button image that can be stocked in the previous button effect is displayed in a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively low, the button image that can be stocked in the later button effect or more is displayed. It can be configured so that the player does not have the suspicion that the button image may not be displayed. Further, when a button image equal to or higher than the stock image is displayed in the later button effect, it is possible to further promote the button image of the later button effect, or the jackpot confirmation pattern or the expectation of a jackpot is 80. It may be configured to have a rule such as a high expectation so as to be about%.

In this embodiment, an example in which a single press is requested as a normal operation mode of the effect button 109 has been described, but in a modified example, repeated hits or long presses are requested as a normal operation mode, and a button image is stocked. As an operation mode for performing the operation, a specification different from these may be required (for example, a single push). Further, an operation mode different from the operation mode required as a normal operation mode at the time of stocking the button image may be requested as a normal operation mode after the stock is released. For example, a button image that is required to be pressed once as a normal operation mode at the time of stock may be specified to require repeated hits as an operation mode after stock release.

In this embodiment, it is suggested that the lighting mode can be stocked by changing the lighting mode from the normal mode, such as blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 during the period when the button image can be stocked. In the modified example, it may be suggested that not only the lighting mode of the effect button 109 but also the display mode of the button image can be changed from the normal mode such as blinking the button image.

Further, in this embodiment, the release of the stock is described as a long-press release operation, and the timing can be arbitrarily set for the player. However, as a modification, the stock is stocked according to a pattern determined in advance by the production lottery. The timing of using the image may be determined. Further, in the modified example, the stock button image cannot be used in the stock pattern of the button image determined by the effect lottery of the third special effect pattern, the variation is terminated, and the stock image is discarded. It may be configured to include a Gase pattern (in the case of including a Gase pattern, it is preferable to configure a button image having a stockable mode so that there is no Gase pattern if the degree of expectation is higher than a certain level). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, since the button image is configured to be stocked during the period when the player presses and holds it for a long time, it is assumed that the player cannot operate the effect button 109 in the button effect during the stock period. Therefore, the button effect in stock may be configured to be replaced with the upper button of the cross key 110, or the auto button (automatic operation) that automatically determines that the button has been pressed during the valid period of the button and produces the effect. ) May be configured to enable the operation-time effect of the button effect in stock.

<Fourth Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, and the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. The player is urged to input an operation, and an effect in which the display mode of the button image changes according to the operation of the effect button 109 is executed. As the button image, a plurality of types of button images having different display modes such as colors, patterns, and shapes are prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by which color, pattern, and shape of the button image is displayed. The height of is different. In the button effect in the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect button 109 during a predetermined valid period while the button image is being displayed, the displayed button image is split into a plurality of button images and proliferated, and the effect button is displayed. It is an effect that repeats division or proliferation each time 109 is pressed. At this time, at least a part of the propagated button image may be a type of button image having a relatively high expectation of a big hit, and by repeating the proliferation, a type of button image having a higher expectation of a big hit may appear. There is sex. The plurality of button images displayed when the effect button 109 is finally pressed changes to individual comment notice images. A button image with a higher expectation of a big hit changes to a comment preview image with a higher expectation of a big hit, suggesting the possibility of a big hit.

The effect determining means 303 selects one from a plurality of types of special effect patterns when the variation pattern of the variation time corresponding to the special effect pattern is selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determination means 303 determines the final proliferation number of the button image by lottery. The final proliferation number of the button image is the number of button images after the final proliferation, for example, up to 2 (1 time) proliferation, up to 4 (2 times) proliferation, up to 8 (3 times) proliferation. Select one of the powers of 2 as in. However, as a modification, it may be propagated to a power number of a natural number other than 2 (for example, in an effect in which one button image is divided into three button images, the power number is 3). It may multiply to a regular or irregular number other than the power number (for example, a production in which a button that divides and a button that does not divide are mixed).

The effect determining means 303 executes a lottery for determining the type of the comment notice image to be displayed as a comment notice for the final breeding number, and sequentially stores the lottery results for the final breeding number in the buffer. There are multiple types of comment preview images corresponding to the lottery results for the final proliferation number stored in the buffer, and each of them individually suggests a high degree of expectation for a big hit. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the button image so that the type of the comment preview image and the type of the corresponding button image match each other with respect to the high degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, when a lottery result of a type with a low jackpot expectation is stored as a comment notice, a white button image (also referred to as a "normal button image") which is a type with a low jackpot expectation as a button image corresponding to the comment notice image. ) Is displayed. When the lottery result of the type with the next highest expectation of big hit is stored as a comment notice, the blue button image ("chance button image") which is the type with the next highest expectation of big hit as the button image corresponding to the comment notice image. ”) Is displayed. When the lottery result of the type with the highest expectation of big hit is stored as a comment notice, the red button image ("big chance button image") which is the type with the highest expectation of big hit as the button image corresponding to the comment notice image. Also called) is displayed.

For example, the lottery results with the lowest expectation of big hits are stored in the buffer in order, and the type of the button image to be displayed first is the button type with the expectation of big hits corresponding to the first lottery result of the buffer. The next buffer area is referred to by the amount of the button image that proliferates each time the effect button 109 is pressed by the player, and the button image of the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to the lottery result stored in the buffer area is displayed. As described above, the effect determining means 303 extracts the lottery result of the comment notice from the buffer as many as the number of button images displayed by the player pressing the actual effect button 109, and the type according to the lottery result. Display the button image and the comment notice image. In this embodiment, an example in which the rank of the big hit expectation is divided into three stages is shown, but as a modified example, four stages or more may be used, or two stages may be used.

Here, in determining the type of button image, not only the three types of "normal button image", "chance button image", and "big chance button image", but also "chance button image by promotion" and "big chance button image by promotion". You may further have two kinds of. "Promotion" is a button that displays a button image of the type one step lower once, and when a predetermined operation mode condition (also referred to as "directing development condition") as a trick or hidden function described later is satisfied. It means to promote the image type by one level. That is, the "chance button image by promotion" displays the normal button image first and then promotes to the chance button image, and the "big chance button image by promotion" displays the chance button image first. Is promoted to a big chance button image. The comment notice image corresponding to the "chance button image" corresponds to the "chance button image by promotion", and the comment notice image corresponding to the "big chance button image" corresponds to the "big chance button image by promotion". As a result of the lottery of the comment notice, considering the case where the button is not pressed and the promotion is not promoted, the one with the lowest expectation of big hit is "normal button image", "chance button image by promotion", "chance button image", "large by promotion". The corresponding lottery results are stored in the buffer in the order of "chance button image" and "large chance button image".

As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may first determine the final proliferation number of the button images, then determine the type and number of button images, and then determine the comment notice. For example, when the final proliferation number is determined to be "8", the white normal button image is determined to be 3, the blue chance button image is determined to be 2, the red chance button image is determined to be 3, and so on. Then, the lottery is executed three times in the lottery table for the comment preview image having the same number of normal button images as the number "3" and the expectation of big hit is low, and the lottery result is stored in the buffer. Similarly, the lottery is executed twice in the lottery table for the comment notice image having a high expectation of big hit as many as the number of chance button images "2", and the lottery result is stored in the buffer. Further, the lottery is executed three times in the lottery table for the comment preview image having the highest expectation of big hit by the same number as the number of big chance button images "3", and the lottery result is stored in the buffer. In this way, the lottery results with the lowest jackpot expectation are stored in the buffer in order, and the type of the button image to be displayed first is the button type with the jackpot expectation corresponding to the first lottery result of the buffer. The next buffer area is referred to by the amount of the button image that proliferates each time the effect button 109 is pressed by the player, and the button image of the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to the lottery result stored in the buffer area is displayed. For example, if the effect button 109 is pressed twice and four button images are displayed, the fourth buffer area is referred to, so that three normal button images and one chance button image are displayed. To. When the button is pressed once more, four buffer areas are referenced, so that the remaining one chance button image and three large chance button images are displayed.

As another modification, the specification may be based on the rule that the type of the button image to be displayed is propagated by one step higher type each time the button is split (however, the red large chance button image is the upper limit type). For example, the first button image must be a white normal button image, the blue chance button image is propagated by splitting from the normal button image, and the normal button image and the chance button image are split into different chance button images. Proliferate the big chance button image. When providing such regularity, the effect determining means 303 does not need to determine the type of the button image in particular.

As yet another modification, the lottery result of the comment notice may be stored in the buffer separately for each type of the corresponding button image. In that case, it is possible to suddenly make a big chance button image appear without displaying the button images in ascending order of expectation.

FIG. 38 schematically shows a screen transition example of the button effect in the fourth embodiment. In the effect based on the special effect pattern of this embodiment, the first button image 570 and the first button pressing instruction 565 are displayed as in the first screen 560. The first button image 570 is a white normal button image suggesting a low jackpot expectation, and the first button pressing instruction 565 is a character string or a character string prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 such as "press the button!". That image. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the valid period of the effect button 109, the effect display such that the first button image 570 and the second button image 571 are split, as shown in the second screen 561. Proliferates into two button images. The second button image 571 that appears due to proliferation is a blue chance button image suggesting a jackpot expectation one step higher than that of the first button image 570.

On the second screen 561, a character string for prompting the player to operate the effect button 109, such as "press the button!", Or an image thereof, the second button pressing instruction 566, is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the valid period of the effect button 109, the first button image 570 is divided into the first button image 570 and the third button image 572, and the second button image is displayed. The effect display such that the 571 is divided into the second button image 571 and the fourth button image 573 proliferates into four button images as in the third screen 562. The third button image 572 that appears due to proliferation is a blue chance button image suggesting a jackpot expectation one step higher than that of the first button image 570. Further, the fourth button image 573 that appears due to proliferation is a red big chance button image suggesting a jackpot expectation one step higher than that of the second button image 571.

On the third screen 562, as a so-called trick or hidden function, a valid period provided in a form not clearly shown to the player is set. That is, although an explicit instruction such as "press the button!" That prompts the player to operate the effect button 109 is not displayed, the effect button is suggested with an implicit mode such as blinking the lamp of the effect button 109. It has a validity period of 109. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player in a predetermined mode within the valid period of the effect button 109, one of the button images is promoted to a button image having a higher expectation of a big hit. In the example of this figure, as shown in the fourth screen 563, the third button image 572 changes from the blue chance button image to the red large chance button image. In this embodiment, the player is required to press the effect button 109 a predetermined number of times as a trick or hidden function effect development condition for promoting the type of the button image. However, as a modification, the operation of the effect button 109 is performed. The establishment of an event other than the above may be a condition for developing the effect. For example, a predetermined number of balls may be inserted into a predetermined number of balls within a valid period, or a predetermined number of balls may be won in a predetermined lottery.

On the fourth screen 563, a character string for prompting the player to operate the effect button 109, such as "press the button!", Or an image thereof, the third button pressing instruction 567, is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the valid period of the effect button 109, the first button image 570, the second button image 571, the third button image 572, as in the fifth screen 564, The fourth button image 573 changes to the first comment notice image 575, the second comment notice image 576, the third comment notice image 577, and the fourth comment notice image 578, respectively. The button image before and after the change corresponds to the high expectation of the big hit suggested by the comment notice, and the first button image 570, which is not the chance button image, is the first comment notice with the low expectation of the big hit, "Come in the darkness". Although it changes to the image 575, the second button image 571, which is a chance button image, changes to the second comment notice image 576, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit, "this light is". In addition, the third button image 572 and the fourth button image 573, which are the big chance button images, change to the third comment notice image 577 and the fourth comment notice image 578, which have higher expectations for big hits, such as "super heat !!". ..

On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is not operated within the valid period of the effect button 109 on the first screen 540, the effective period does not occur thereafter, and the button images such as those from the second screen 561 to the fourth screen 563 are displayed. No division or proliferation, and no promotion. However, when the effect button 109 is pressed in response to the last button pressing instruction such as the third button pressing instruction 567 on the fourth screen 563, only the comment notice image corresponding to the first button image 570 is displayed. .. As a modification, the specification may be such that the comment notice image is not displayed when the effect button 109 is not pressed even once in response to the button press instruction. As another modification, even if there is a valid period in which the button is not pressed, the specification may be such that the occurrence of the valid period after that is not hindered and the button may be propagated later. As described above, when the subsequent effect is omitted, as an alternative effect, for example, in the case of a battle effect, an effect may be displayed in which the process in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character competes and is not settled is displayed. ..

As yet another modification, the first button pressing instruction 565 and the second button pressing instruction 566 are not displayed on the first screen 560 and the second screen 561, the effect period of the effect button 109 is not provided, and the effect button by the player is not provided. The specification may be such that the button image is divided or proliferated each time a predetermined time elapses without pressing 109.

FIG. 39 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process in one example of the button effect of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 39A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 39B shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the button effect. FIG. 39 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 39 (d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the effect button 109, its length, the lighting color, or the lighting mode. FIG. 39 (e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 39 (f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the effect button 109.

In the button effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), a notice effect suggesting the occurrence of reach is displayed during the "pre-reach notice" period of S1120, and the first button effect is "step". 1 ”(S1121) is displayed, the branch effect (S1122) is displayed, the second button effect“ step 2 ”(S1123) is displayed, the branch effect (S1124) is displayed, and the third button effect is displayed. "Step 3" (S1125) is displayed, a branch effect (S1126) is displayed, and a comment notice effect (S1127) is displayed.

In "step 1" (S1121), the first button pressing instruction 565 requesting the pressing of the effect button 109 is displayed, and the first valid period (S1131) of the effect button 109 is provided. Before the first valid period (S1131), the effect button 109 is in the invalid period (S1130). In the first valid period, a white normal button image is displayed (S1150), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is lit in white (S1140). The lamp of the effect button 109 indicates that the effect period of the effect button 109 is valid by its lighting, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a big hit. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player in the first valid period (S1131) (S1160), a sound effect is output (S1170), and a branch effect (S1122) that encourages whether or not the normal button image is split is performed. After that, the chance button image is split from the normal button image.

In "step 2" (S1123), a second button pressing instruction 566 requesting the pressing of the effect button 109 is displayed, and a second valid period (S1133) of the effect button 109 is provided. The period from the first valid period (S1131) to the second valid period (S1133) is an invalid period (S1132). In the second valid period (S1133), the white normal button image and the blue chance button image are displayed (S1151), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is lit in blue (S1141). When a plurality of types of button images are displayed, in principle, the lamp of the effect button 109 is turned on according to the same color as the type having the highest expectation of big hit among the displayed button images. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player in the second valid period (S1133) (S1161), a sound effect is output (S1171), and a branch effect that encourages whether the normal button image and the chance button image are split. (S1124), the chance button image is split from the normal button image, and the large chance button image is split from the chance button image.

In "step 3" (S1125), first, a third valid period (S1135) of the effect button 109 is provided. The period from the second valid period (S1133) to the third valid period (S1135) is an invalid period (S1134). However, the third valid period is a valid period as a trick or hidden function that is not specified to the player, and although the normal button image, chance button image, and big chance button image are displayed, the highest expectation of big hit is exceptional. The lamp of the effect button 109 blinks in the same color as the normal button image with the lowest expectation of big hit, not the big chance button image with high. As a modification, the lamp of the effect button 109 is simply turned on in a color with a low expectation of a big hit, or on the contrary, it is turned off to make it a special lighting mode that is not in principle, implying that it is a valid period. You may suggest. When the effect button 109 is pressed twice (S1162, S1163) in a predetermined pressing mode during the third valid period, a sound effect is output according to the pressing (S1172, S1173), and any of the buttons. The image type is promoted by one level. For example, one of the chance button images is promoted to a big chance button image. In the example of this figure, an example in which two presses are required as an effect expansion condition has been described, but as a modification, a specification that requires a larger number of presses, for example, 10 consecutive hits may be used.

In "step 3" (S1125), a third button pressing instruction 567 requesting the pressing of the effect button 109 is further displayed, and a fourth valid period (S1137) of the effect button 109 is provided. The period from the third valid period (S1135) to the fourth valid period (S1137) is an invalid period (S1136). When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player in the fourth valid period (S1137) (S1164), a sound effect is output (S1174), and a branch effect (S1126) is performed to encourage whether or not each button image is split. After that, each button image changes to a comment notice image, and a comment notice effect is displayed (S1127). During S1126 and S1127, the effect button 109 has an invalid period (S1138).

If no operation input is made by the player during the first valid period (S1131), the second valid period (S1133), and the third valid period (S1135), the button image is split or proliferated or the button type is promoted. Is not displayed. In that case, the subsequent execution of the button effect is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative effect. As an alternative effect, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the effect, that is, an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the button effect is composed of a battle effect, if there is no operation of the effect button 109, the effect that the ally character and the enemy character are in competition and cannot win or lose is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image is displayed as it is. Or, the final success / failure branch effect is reached without displaying the button effect. Further, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or switched to an effect of re-variating.

As a modification of this embodiment, when a button image with a higher expectation is propagated due to division, the button image can be retracted to the edge of the screen or the corner of the screen and left (stocked) until the subsequent production. May be. The retracted button image is utilized in a later production as in the second embodiment and the third embodiment, and has a role of notifying that a production with a high expectation of a big hit will be executed in the later production. In this case, the types of button images that can be evacuated and stocked may be limited to chance button images and large chance button images that have a relatively high expectation of big hits.

<Fifth Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment, and the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of advance notice effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special effect pattern" or "notice scenario pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109. Is displayed on the screen to prompt the player to input an operation, and prior to the start of the period in which the operation of the effect button 109 is valid, an effect suggesting the required time or waiting time until the start (hereinafter, "button"). "Timer production") is executed. As the button image, a plurality of types of button images having different display modes such as colors, patterns, and shapes are prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by which color, pattern, and shape of the button image is displayed. The height of is different. The button timer effect in this embodiment is based on the premise that when the player presses the effect button 109 during a predetermined valid period while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined effect such as a pass / fail branch effect or a reach effect can be executed. The "predetermined effect" referred to here may be various reach effects or another notice effect such as a comment notice. Before the valid period of the effect button 109 is started, a notice effect indicating the time required until the start or the waiting time in the form of a "button timer" is displayed in the vicinity of the button image. As a result, compared to the case where the valid period of the effect button 109 is started at the same time as or before or after the appearance of the button image, the player can be notified in advance of the start of the valid period and the effect button can be made to stand by. It is possible to increase the possibility that 109 will be properly operated within the validity period. The "required time" or "waiting time" may be the apparent time displayed in the production, and is configured to add changes such as fast forward, rewind, and pause to the measured time display. You may.

The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of special effect patterns by lottery when the variation pattern of the variation time and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern are selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not the button image and the button timer are displayed, the display timing thereof, and the like. Further, in this embodiment, at least two types of special effect patterns will be described as button timer effects using the button timer. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, these two types of special effect patterns will be referred to as a first special effect pattern and a second special effect pattern.

FIG. 40 schematically shows a screen transition example of the button timer effect in the first special effect pattern of the fifth embodiment. In the button timer effect based on the first special effect pattern, the button image 590 and the first standby state display 600 are displayed as in the first screen 580. The button image 590 is a white normal button image suggesting a low jackpot expectation, and the first standby state display 600 is a character string indicating that it is before the start of the valid period of the effect button 109 such as "waiting" or a character string thereof. It is an image. After that, the button timer effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen so as not to interfere with the variable display and the variable effect of the decorative symbol 506.

In this embodiment, an example in which the button image is displayed together with the first standby state display 600 such as "waiting" from the symbol variation effect before the symbol variation effect which is originally the target of the button timer effect will be described. In the example, the specification may be such that the button image is displayed only within the symbol variation effect that is the target of the original button timer effect. Alternatively, as a general rule, a button image and the characters "waiting" may be always displayed in the corners of the screen in all the symbol variation effects, and this may be positioned as a "button standby effect" in distinction from the "button timer effect". In that case, in the symbol variation effect that is the target of the original button timer effect, only the effect of displaying the countdown timer or the like together with the button image may be called "button timer effect".

In the symbol variation effect that is the target of the button timer effect, the second standby state display 601 is displayed above the button image 590. The second standby state display 601 is an image of a timer that counts down the valid period of the effect button 109 or the required time or the waiting time until the suggestion is started on the second screen 581. The second standby state display 601 notifies that the valid period of the effect button 109 will start after the lapse of the remaining time such as "10 seconds remaining" indicated by the timer. The "timer" of this embodiment is displayed in the form of counting down the remaining time, but in the modified example, it may be displayed in the form of counting up the arrival of the required time until the start of the valid period from zero. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the form of an indicator (meter display or gauge display) instead of a number. When the timer is displayed by the indicator, in the above-mentioned "button standby effect", an effect of increasing the amount of time displayed by the indicator based on the result of the effect (prolonging the time measured as a timer) may be executed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that a button effect will occur in the latter half of the fluctuation process (for example, after the development of super reach). Further, depending on the amount of time suggested by the timer, the display mode (color, size, shape of decorative design, etc.) of the indicator or the like in the "button standby effect" or the "button timer effect" may be changed. .. For example, by replacing the blue numbers and indicators with red numbers and indicators in the default mode, the player may be configured to give a sense of expectation even during the timekeeping of the timer. Further, depending on the change of the display mode added to the indicator or the like, an effect suggesting the same display mode may be added to the button image at the time of button production.

Below the button image 590, the first button instruction display 610, which is a character string of "button is being prepared", is displayed. The first button instruction display 610 notifies the player in advance that the valid period of the effect button 109 is about to start, and indicates in the form of a character string the contents to be prepared for the operation of the effect button 109.

The button image 590 is displayed so that the first character image 591 is attached to the right side thereof. The first character image 591 is an image used for a promotion effect that encourages whether or not to promote the type of the button image 590 by the operation of the image. In this embodiment, the motif is a character of a girl holding an umbrella, but the motif is not limited to such a character image, and an image other than the character may be used.

The third screen 582 indicates that the button image is being promoted. The promotion effect is an image in which the "umbrella" of the first character image 591 is covered with the button image 590 displayed up to the second screen 581 (mainly only the spread umbrella is displayed and the button image is almost hidden by the umbrella. This image is called "2nd character image 592"), and while the button image is not visible with an umbrella, it is a production that encourages whether or not it is replaced with a button image of a type with a higher expectation of a big hit. be. In the promotion effect, the third standby state display 602 displayed above the second character image 592 indicates that the progress of the timer is temporarily stopped and reset, such as "remaining ?? seconds", and the waiting time is extended. It is suggested. Below the second character image 592, a character string such as "Preparing for drive gear" is displayed as the second button instruction display 611. The "drive gear" here refers to a button image with a lever, and it is suggested that it is promoted to the type of button image with the highest expectation of big hit. It is suggested that the expectation of big hits has increased due to these promotion effects. As a modification of the third standby state display 602 in the promotion effect, a character string such as "remaining 3 seconds" is not suddenly switched to a character string such as "remaining ?? seconds", but an effect that encourages whether or not the character string is switched. May increase the player's expectation for the promotion effect by adding.

On the fourth screen 583, the "umbrella", which is the second character image 592 of the third screen 582, moves to the right from the position of the button image and returns to the first character image 591, and has a lever as a button image after promotion. The button image 593 is exposed. Below the button image 593 with a lever, a word prompting the player to operate the button image 593 with a lever is displayed as a third button instruction display 612 with a character string such as "pull the drive gear!".

As described above, an example in which the promotion effect is generated and the type of the button image is promoted has been described in this figure, but the promotion effect does not always occur, and the promotion effect may not occur. Also, even if a promotion effect occurs, it is not always promoted, and even if the "umbrella" of the second character image 592 returns to its original position, the type of button image may remain the same as before the promotion effect. ..

FIG. 41 schematically shows a screen transition example of the button timer effect in the second special effect pattern of the fifth embodiment. The second special effect pattern is used especially in the variable effect that develops into super reach. In the button timer effect based on the second special effect pattern, the first button image 630 and the first standby state display 640 are displayed on the first screen 620 as in the first screen 580 of the first special effect pattern. The first button image 630 is a white normal button image suggesting a low jackpot expectation, and the first standby state display 640 is a character string indicating that it is before the start of the valid period of the effect button 109 such as "waiting". Or that image. After that, the button timer effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen so as not to interfere with the variable display and the variable effect of the decorative symbol 506.

The second screen 621 is the same as the second screen 581 of the first special effect pattern, and the second standby state display 641 is displayed above the first button image 630. The second standby state display 641 is an image of a timer that counts down the valid period of the effect button 109 or the time required until the suggestion is started or the standby time. The second standby state display 641 notifies that the valid period of the effect button 109 will start after the lapse of the remaining time such as "10 seconds remaining" indicated by the timer.

Below the first button image 630, the first button instruction display 650, which is a character string of "button preparation", is displayed. At this time, one of the three decorative symbols 506 is stopped. The first button instruction display 650 notifies the player in advance that the valid period of the effect button 109 is about to start, and indicates in the form of a character string the contents to be prepared for the operation of the effect button 109. These notices suggest the occurrence of reach and high expectation of big hits. The first button image 630 is displayed so that the first character image 591 is attached to the right side thereof. The first character image 591 is an image used for promotion effect in which whether or not the type of the first button image 630 is promoted later is fanned by the action of the character. In this embodiment, the motif is a character of a girl holding an umbrella, but the motif is not limited to such a character image, and an image other than the character may be used.

The third screen 622 indicates that the button image is being promoted. This promotion effect is displayed when the reach of the decorative symbol 506 occurs, and the effect of dividing or multiplying the first button image 630 displayed up to the second screen 621 is displayed in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment. Due to the division or proliferation, the first button image 630 to the second button image 632 and the third button image 633 are propagated and displayed vertically side by side. The proliferation of button images is repeated until the button timer reaches zero, suggesting that the type of button image is likely to be promoted due to the large number of propagated button images. The third standby state display 642 is displayed above the first button image 630, the second button image 632, and the third button image 633, the first character image 591 is displayed on the right side, and the second button is displayed below. The instruction display 651 is displayed. The third standby state display 642 indicates the progress state of the button timer, such as "3 seconds remaining". As the second button instruction display 651, a character string such as "button stocking" indicates that the button image is divided, propagated, and deferred on the screen. In this way, the button image is repeatedly divided or propagated until the remaining time shown in the third standby state display 642 becomes zero, and the button image is stocked.

When the remaining time becomes zero and it is time to execute the notice effect that is the target of the button timer (here, an example is the stage of displaying whether or not three decorative symbols 506 are of the same type). An animation in which the button images of the above are combined into one button image is displayed, and a button image 634 with a lever such as, for example, the fourth screen 623 is displayed as the combined button image. The type of button image after promotion differs depending on the number of button images before promotion. For example, when two button images are merged, it is promoted to a blue chance button image, and when three button images are merged, it is promoted to a white button image with a lever as shown in the figure, and six button images. When they merge, they are promoted to a button image with a red lever. Whenever the effect of stocking button images such as the third screen 622 is activated, the stock of two or more button images is displayed, and the union of these multiple button images is guaranteed, so the button image is more than the chance button image. The promotion of is confirmed, and the expectation of big hits will increase. As a modification, the promotion may be performed not according to the number of stocked button images, but whether or not the promotion is performed by the same number of times as the number of stocked button images. In that case, for example, the effect may be such that the character images throw the button images stocked with respect to the main button image in the effect one by one to encourage whether or not the button image is promoted. Alternatively, an animation may be displayed in which a plurality of button images are crushed one-to-one and merged, and each time the button images are merged, it may be an effect to encourage whether or not the button images are promoted to other colors.

On the fourth screen 623, a button image 634 with a lever in which a plurality of button images are combined into one and promoted is displayed. Below the button image 634 with a lever, a word prompting the player to operate the button image 634 with a lever is displayed as a third button instruction display 652 with a character string such as "Pull the drive gear!". The first character image 591 is displayed on the right side of the button image 634 with a lever. When the effect button 109, which is a button with a lever, is operated by the player, a winning branch effect, which is an effect of winning or not, is displayed as to whether or not three decorative symbols 506 are of the same type. As a modification, in addition to changing the button image to a chance button according to the number of stocked button images, it is possible to select a pattern that changes the operation mode for the effect button 109 according to the number of stocked buttons. It may be configured to be. With this configuration, for example, a player who expects to display a button image with a lever when the target effect of the button timer is executed in a situation where three button images are stocked is produced. It is possible to give unexpectedness and interest by switching to an effect that requires a plurality of operations, such as an effect of repeatedly hitting the button 109. Further, it may be configured to have a pattern for executing both promotion of the button image in the present embodiment and change of the operation mode of the modified example.

FIG. 42 is a time chart schematically showing an effect process in an example of a button timer effect based on the first special effect pattern. FIG. 42A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 42B shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the button timer effect. FIG. 42 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 42D shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the effect button 109, its length, the lighting color, or the lighting mode. FIG. 42 (e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 42 (f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the effect button 109.

In the effect period based on the first special effect pattern, a plurality of advance notice effects are displayed, of which two advance notice effects are button advance notice effects. One of the two button notice effects is "non-target button notice", and the other is "target button notice". The "non-target button notice" is a notice effect that does not accompany the button timer effect, that is, is not the target of the advance notice by the button timer. The "target button notice" is a notice effect that accompanies a button timer effect, that is, is a target of advance notice by the button timer.

First, in the period of "front fluctuation" of S1220 in FIG. 42 (b), that is, in the symbol fluctuation period one before the symbol fluctuation period targeted by the first special effect pattern, a button image like S1250 and "standby" are already performed. "Medium" characters are displayed. The lamp of the effect button 109 is white and can be switched between light and dark in a slow cycle (S1240). While displaying the button image and the character "waiting", a notification sound indicating that the start of the button timer effect is about to start may be output based on the look-ahead result (S1270). In addition, although the size shown in the figure is expressed small for convenience, the "front fluctuation" includes a case where there are multiple symbol fluctuation periods.

In the symbol variation period that is the target of the first special effect pattern (S1221), the "non-target button notice" is started at a predetermined timing (S1222), and the lamp of the effect button 109 blinks in white (S1241). A first valid period (S1231) of the effect button 109 is provided between the "non-target button notice". Before the first valid period (S1231), the effect button 109 is in the invalid period (S1230). When the effect button 109 is operated in the first valid period (S1260), a branch effect that encourages whether or not to develop into the next effect is displayed (S1223). In parallel with the above "non-target button notice", a button timer effect that gives a countdown notice by the button timer until the start of the valid period of the effect button 109 is displayed prior to the "target button notice" as described below.

A button timer, which is a combination of a button image and a character string such as "10 seconds remaining", is displayed at a predetermined timing (S1252), and a start sound notifying the start of the countdown by the timer is output (S1271). Next, before the countdown timer reaches zero, the character image overlaps with the button image and the button disappears, and by displaying "remaining ?? seconds", the countdown timer is stopped and reset, and the promotion effect starts ( S1253). The lamp of the effect button 109 changes one after another with a plurality of emission colors (S1242), and a sound that encourages whether or not the type of the button image is promoted is output (S1272). After that, along with the output of the confirmation sound indicating the confirmation of the button image type (S1273), the promoted button image (for example, the button image with a lever) appears (S1254). The value of the remaining time of the timer is reset to the upper part of the button image, such as "30 seconds remaining", and the countdown is restarted. The lamp of the effect button 109 is white and blinks at high speed, suggesting that the "target button notice" is about to start. Although not shown, a sound effect or the like at the time of button operation (S1260) in the non-target button notice (S1222) can also be output as a sound effect. When the sound effect at the time of operating the non-target button notice overlaps with the fanning sound (S1272), the definite sound (S1273), etc. in this embodiment, the sound effect, etc. at the time of operation, the fanning sound, or the definite sound is the game. The output volume, the position of the output speaker (sound channel), and the like are set based on a predetermined priority order, depending on whether or not the sound gives a feeling of expectation to the person.

The remaining time of the countdown timer becomes zero, and the "target button notice" is displayed (S1224). A second valid period (S1233) of the effect button 109 is provided between the "target button notice". During the second valid period (S1233) and the first valid period (S1231), the effect button 109 is an invalid period (S1232). In the second valid period, the button image with the lever is displayed (S1255), and the lamp of the effect button 109 lights up in red along with the display of the operation instruction such as "pull the drive gear!" (S1244). When the effect button 109 is operated in the second valid period (S1261), a pass / fail branch effect that incites the display of the pass / fail result is displayed (S1225). The effect button 109 is in an invalid period during the pass / fail branch effect (S1234).

In the first valid period (S1231) and the second valid period (S1233), even if no operation input is made by the player, the subsequent effect may be displayed, or the subsequent effect may be omitted. The rest of the period may be replaced with an alternative production. As an alternative effect, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the effect, that is, an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the button notice effect is composed of a battle effect, if there is no operation of the effect button 109, an effect that the ally character and the enemy character are in competition and cannot win or lose is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button is displayed as it is. The final success / failure branch effect is reached without displaying the image or the subsequent effect. Further, for example, as an alternative effect to replace the normal subsequent effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or re-variable.

FIG. 43 schematically shows a notice scenario determination table. In the "ID" column, notice scenario pattern IDs 1 to 19 are shown, and 19 types of notice scenario patterns are exemplified in this figure. For each of the plurality of variable effect patterns selected by the effect determining means 303, 3 to 6 types of 19 types of advance notice scenario patterns are associated with each of them, and 3 to 6 types of advance notices are associated with each other. One of the scenario patterns is selected by lottery. For example, when a 50-second variation pattern is selected on the main board 200 and a 50-second variation effect pattern A is selected by the effect determination means 303 as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, the variation effect is used as the advance notice scenario pattern. One of several types of patterns corresponding to pattern A (each pattern is composed of a scenario corresponding to a variation effect of 50 seconds) is selected by lottery.

As a notice scenario pattern, one effect scenario is composed of a combination of effects such as a notice effect and a reach effect displayed for each block by dividing one variable effect period into a maximum of eight blocks. Of the blocks for a maximum of 8 periods, 6 blocks from "block A" to "block F" are pre-reach notices, and "block G" and "block H" are post-reach notices. However, these 8 blocks are not necessarily the periods in which the variable effect period is divided, and the advance notice effects selected for each block may be displayed so that a part of the period overlaps with each other. .. That is, "block A" to "block H" do not specify an absolute effect period, but merely specify a relative effect order, or each block can be executed at the same time. It only indicates a category.

In addition, as a "notice scenario determination table", multiple types of tables with different types of notice scenario patterns and selection tendencies are prepared, and the types of variable effect patterns, the high degree of expectation of big hits, the background image being displayed, the effect mode, etc. You may decide which notice scenario determination table to refer to according to the situation. The lottery table for determining the type of advance notice effect to be selected according to the advance notice scenario pattern and the type of the advance notice effect also corresponds to the type of variable effect pattern, the high degree of expectation of big hit, the background image being displayed, the effect mode, and the like. It may be decided to be.

In the advance notice scenario determination table of FIG. 43, "block A" and "block B" in the early stage are "A-", which is a production whose main purpose is to excite the game by the production content and movement, as shown by "lively system". One of "1", "A-2", "B-1", and "B-2" may be displayed, or a special effect may not be displayed during that period as shown by "None". "A-1" and "A-2" may be, for example, a comment notice, an operation of a character image, a swinging operation of a movable accessory, and the like. The "B-1" and "B-2" may be, for example, an effect of inciting whether or not continuous fluctuation is achieved in a pseudo continuous variation effect, or an effect of inciting whether or not reach is established.

For "block C" and "block D", either "C-1" to "C-4" or "D-1" to "D-3" is displayed as "normal notice", or "none". In some cases, no particular effect is displayed during that period. For example, for an effect pattern with a pattern ID of "1", the effect of "A-1" is displayed in "block A", no effect is displayed in "block B", and "C-" is displayed in "block C". It is stipulated that the effect of "1" is displayed and that the effect is not particularly displayed in "block D".

Here, the underlined effect such as "D-1" indicates that the button image can be displayed as a button notice effect. However, whether or not the button image is actually displayed is determined by another lottery shown in FIG. 44 below. Of the button notice effects, the lottery for determining whether or not to display the button timer is executed for the pattern IDs "13", "15", "16", "18", and "19" (all IDs are underlined). It is a notice scenario pattern that is written as "Yes" in the "Timer" column at the right end.)

Of the blocks of up to 8 periods, "block E" in the middle stage is the production period of "development notice", and "E-1" which is a notice production suggesting the development to reach may be displayed. "Block F" is a production period of "reach fanning", and "F-1", which is a production that fuels whether or not to develop into reach, may be displayed. "F-1" is a button notice effect in which a button image can be displayed as underlined. “Block G” and “block H” are production periods after the start of reach, and in “block G” in the first half of reach, any one from “reach a” to “reach f” may be displayed. In "block H" in the latter half of the reach, "reach g" may be displayed. Of these reach effects, button images may be displayed in the underlined "reach a", "reach c", "reach d", "reach f", and "reach g".

FIG. 44 schematically shows a table for determining the display timing of the button timer. As shown in FIG. 43, when five types of advance notice scenario pattern IDs "13", "15", "16", "18", and "19" are selected, the display timing of the button timer is determined by lottery and displayed. To. As shown in the right column of this figure, a lottery value range is assigned to each of the IDs "13", "15", "16", "18", and "19", and one of the timings is selected. The display timing of the button timer is when it is displayed in any one of the three places from "Timing 1" to "Timing 3", when it is displayed in any two places, and when it is displayed in all three places. There can be. For example, in the period of "notice C to E", the production of "D-1" in the example of FIG. 43 corresponds, and in the period of "notice F", the production of "F-1" in the example of FIG. 43 The time corresponds, and in the period of "notice G, H", the production time of "reach a", "reach c", "reach d", "reach f", and "reach g" in the example of FIG. 43 corresponds.

For example, in the case of IDs "13" and "15", the display timing of the button timer is selected from three ways, "timing 1 only", "timing 2 only", and "timing 1 and 2". For example, in the case of the ID "16", the display timing of the button timer is selected from four ways, "timing 1 only", "timing 2 only", "timing 3 only", and "timing 1 and 2". For example, in the case of ID "18", the display timing of the button timer is selected from three ways, "timing 1 only", "timing 3 only", and "timing 1 and 3". For example, in the case of ID "19", the display timing of the button timer is selected from three ways, "timing 2 only", "timing 3 only", and "timing 2 and 3".

In the example of this figure, the display timing is determined from three ways of "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3", but as modification examples, "timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 2 (with promotion)", and "timing 3" The display timing may be determined in combination with the presence / absence of promotion of the button image type by the promotion effect, such as options such as "Timing 3 (with promotion)". However, the number indicating this timing (timing N) may indicate the order from the start of the symbol change, and is the same as the number (timing X) indicating the timing of the button advance notice effect to be counted down by the button timer. When it is small (that is, it is earlier in time than the timing of the button advance notice effect), the display of the button timer is determined. As a modification, the number indicating the timing of the button timer and the button advance notice effect may be set so as to indicate the order from the end of the symbol variation. Further, when the timing N of the button timer is a number larger than the timing X of the button advance notice effect (when the timing of the button timer is later than the timing of the advance notice effect), the timing of the button timer. May be forcibly set to the earliest "timing 1".

If the variable effect ends before the reach is established, it is the notice period with the lowest expectation of a big hit before the reach, regardless of the lottery result of FIG. 44 or the lottery result of FIG. "Notice C" may be forcibly determined as the display timing of the button timer.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, when the display timing of the button notice effect is determined by determining the type and timing of the notice effect based on the notice scenario pattern, the button timer is used when the button notice effect is included. Determine whether to display. These may be determined by the effect determining means 303 by a batch lottery, or may be determined by an individual lottery. When it is decided to display the button timer, the display timing of the button timer may be determined by referring to the lottery table in which the button timer effect is easily selected.

When the advance notice scenario pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned second special effect pattern is selected, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not the button image is in stock. In that case, since the type of the final button image is already determined in the notice scenario pattern (whether the normal button image, the chance button image, or the button image with the lever is finally displayed is determined in the notice scenario pattern. ), The number of button images to be stocked and the timing of stocking are determined according to the type of the button image.

<Sixth Example>
This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment, and the common points will be explained. Omit.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of advance notice effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. A notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "button notice effect") that prompts the player to input an operation is displayed. In the button advance notice effect, when the operation means is operated within the valid period of the operation input, the displayed button image is saved in the effected area provided at the predetermined position on the screen and accumulated up to the predetermined limit. The accumulated one or more button images can be used in subsequent productions. As the button image, a plurality of types of button images having different display modes such as colors, patterns, and shapes are prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by which color, pattern, and shape of the button image is displayed. The height of is different. The button notice effect in this embodiment is premised on the fact that when the player presses the effect button 109 during the predetermined valid period while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined effect such as a pass / fail branch effect or a reach effect can be executed. The "predetermined effect" referred to here may be various reach effects or another notice effect such as a comment notice.

The effect determining means 303 may select one of a plurality of types of special effect patterns by lottery when the variation pattern of the variation time and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern are selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the button notice effect, the number of times of display, the display timing, the type of the button image, and the like.

FIG. 45 schematically shows a screen transition example of the button notice effect in the sixth embodiment. In this button advance notice effect, the button image 671 is displayed on the screen together with a character string instructing the button press such as "press the button!" As in the first screen 660. The button image 671 is a white normal button image suggesting a low jackpot expectation. A directed area 675 is provided in the lower left corner of the screen. The effected area 675 is an area in which the button images displayed in the past button notice effect are reduced and saved, and up to five reduced button images are accumulated as a history in the effected area 675 in the order of effect execution. To. From the left of the produced area 675, the first button image 670a, the second button image 670b, the third button image 670c, the fourth button image 670d, and the fifth button image 670e are arranged in the order of oldest. The first button image 670a, the second button image 670b, and the fourth button image 670d are white normal button images, the fifth button image 670e is a blue chance button image, and the third button image 670c is a red big chance. It is a button image.

When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the valid period, the button image 671 is reduced and saved in the effect area 675 as shown in the second screen 661 after the corresponding effect is executed. At this time, the oldest image, the first button image 670a, is erased, and the positions of the second button image 670b, the third button image 670c, the fourth button image 670d, and the fifth button image 670e are moved one frame at a time to the left. The reduced button image of the newly saved button image 671 is stored as the sixth button image 670f at the right end position of the produced area 675. The above is the basic display process of the button image in the button notice effect. As a general rule, up to five types of button images stored in the produced area 675 are stored as a history of button images in a memory such as a sub RAM 311 by a method following a first-in first-out method (FIFO). When a new button effect is generated, the effect determining means 303 deletes the oldest button image type from the stored button image history and adds a new button image type. In the produced area 675, the types of button images stored in this history are displayed in the order of their respective storage positions.

In the button advance notice effect, the button introduction effect may be displayed prior to the appearance of the button image. The button introduction effect may be displayed as a notice effect for announcing the appearance of the button image. The button introduction effect is an effect in which, prior to the display of the button image and the button operation instruction, which of the multiple types of button images is displayed is selected from the past button images displayed in the effected area 675. Is. In the produced area 675, a plurality of types of button images suggesting the high expectation of individual jackpots are accumulated, and the jackpot expectation of the button notice effect is determined depending on which one is selected. It is possible to raise the expectation of the person. Further, in principle, if the button introduction effect is executed only when the type of the chance button image or more is selected, the effect of selecting the button image is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit can be expected to be higher than a certain level. In the button introduction effect shown on the third screen 662, a character image 672 appears in or near the produced area 675, and the character image 672 is displayed so as to move around to express the state of selecting the button image. .. In the example of this figure, the character image 672 selects the third button image 670c, which is a large chance button image, is taken out from the produced area 675, and is enlarged while being pushed out to substantially the center of the screen.

Whether or not to execute the button introduction effect is determined by the effect determining means 303. The type of button image displayed in the button notice effect for the past 5 times is stored as a history. The effect determining means 303 refers to whether or not the button images that can be displayed in the button advance notice effect are included in the history for the past five times when the new button advance notice effect is executed. The effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the button introduction effect when the history includes a button image that can be displayed in the new button notice effect. That is, the button image displayed within the past 5 times is taken out from the effected area 675 and redisplayed in the center. For example, when extracting the second button image from the oldest in the history, the data of the second button image from the oldest in the stored button image history is taken out and deleted from the history, and the third to fifth button images are taken out. After moving or rewriting the address of the storage position as the data of the 2nd to 4th button images, the new button image, that is, the data of the extracted button image is moved to the latest (fifth) position after the button notice effect. to add. However, depending on the decision timing of the button introduction effect, it is possible that the oldest button image in the history has been deleted from the screen before and after the actual button introduction effect execution timing, so it is the oldest in the history. The button image may be excluded from the reference. Alternatively, at the timing of determining the button introduction effect, the oldest button image in the history is displayed only when the previous button advance notice effect is being executed (that is, the timing when the history update of the button image is about to occur). The specifications may be excluded from the reference. On the contrary, when deciding whether or not to execute the button introduction effect at a fixed timing such as when the symbol change starts, regardless of the history update timing of the button image, refer to the oldest button image in the history uniformly. It may be excluded from the target. In addition, the history of the button image is referred to at a timing retroactively for a predetermined short time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start timing of the button advance notice effect, not at the start of the symbol change, so as not to overlap with the history update timing of the button image. You may do it. However, when the button advance notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the symbol change, the history of the button image may be referred to at the start of the symbol change as an exception.

As a modification, the effect determining means 303 first determines whether or not to execute the button introduction effect, then refers to the history of the button image, and cancels the button introduction effect when there is no button image that can be displayed in the history. May be. In addition, when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect multiple times, for example, when the large chance button image is scheduled to be displayed in the button advance notice effect to be executed later, but there is no large chance button image in the history. A large chance button image may be displayed in the button advance notice effect to be executed first and added to the history, and then the button introduction effect may be executed in the button advance notice effect to be executed later.

FIG. 46 is a time chart schematically showing an effect process in the button advance notice effect of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 46A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 46B shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the button timer effect. FIG. 46 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 46D shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the effect button 109, its length, the lighting color, or the lighting mode. FIG. 46 (e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 46 (f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the effect button 109.

In the example of this figure, the button notice effect is displayed three times including the change of the pattern immediately before. One of the three button notice effects is the "target button notice" that is the execution target of the button introduction effect, and the other two are the "non-target button notice" that does not accompany the button introduction effect.

First, during the period (S1320) of the “front fluctuation” referred to in FIG. 46 (b), the button advance notice effect is executed as the non-target button advance notice effect (S1321). During that time, the chance button image and the five reduced button images accumulated in the effected area 675 are displayed (S1350), the effect button 109 becomes valid (S1331), and the lamp of the effect button 109 lights up in blue (S1340). ). Before the first valid period (S1331), the effect button 109 is in the invalid period (S1330). When the effect button 109 is operated in the first valid period (S1360), a branch effect that encourages whether or not to develop into the next effect is displayed (S1322). The oldest button image on the left end of the 5 button images in the produced area 675 is deleted, the remaining 4 button images are moved one frame at a time to the left, and the reduced image of the blue chance button image is the produced area. Move to the right end of 675 and join (S1351).

Next, during the period (S1323) of the "change" referred to in FIG. 46 (b), a new button advance notice effect is executed as a non-target button advance notice effect (S1324), and is accumulated in the normal button image and the effected area 675. The five reduced button images are displayed (S1352), the effect button 109 is in the second valid period (S1333), and the lamp of the effect button 109 is lit in white (S1341). The effect button 109 is an invalid period (S1332) between the second valid period (S1333) and the first valid period (S1331). When the effect button 109 is operated in the second valid period (S1361), a branch effect that encourages whether or not to develop into the next effect is displayed (S1325). The oldest button image on the left end of the 5 button images in the produced area 675 is deleted, the remaining 4 button images are moved to the left one frame at a time, and the reduced image of the white normal button image is the produced area. Move to the right end of 675 and join (S1353).

Next, in the period of "the fluctuation" (S1323), the second button notice effect is executed as the target button notice effect (S1329). Here, the red big chance button image is scheduled to be displayed, but since the big chance button image remains in the history, it is decided to execute the button introduction effect before S1329. As a button introduction effect, first a character image 672 appears (S1326), and then the character image 672 is made to stand by in the vicinity of the effected area 675 (S1327). While displaying the state of selecting whether to take out the image (S1328), the lamp of the effect button 109 is emitted with the emission color corresponding to the color of the adjacent button image, and the emission color of the effect button 109 is changed as the character image 672 moves. Switching (S1342). When the character image 672 displays the state of selecting the red big chance button image, a sound effect for notifying the determination of the button image is output (S1370). During the period of S1329, the red big chance button image is displayed, the remaining four button images are displayed in the effected area 675, and a blank is displayed at the position where the big chance button image was (S1355). ). A character image 672 is displayed in the vicinity of the big chance button image. The effect button 109 has a third valid period (S1335), and the lamp of the effect button 109 lights up in red (S1343). During the third valid period (S1335) and the second valid period (S1333), the effect button 109 is an invalid period (S1334). When the effect button 109 is operated in the third valid period (S1362), a branch effect that encourages whether or not to develop into the next effect is displayed (S1330). The oldest button image on the left end of the 5 button images in the produced area 675 is deleted, the blank and the remaining 3 button images are moved to the left one frame at a time, and the reduced image of the red big chance button image is displayed. Move to the right end of the directed area 675 and join (S1356). After the third valid period, it becomes an invalid period (S1336), and the symbol change shifts to the next change (S1331). As a modification of S1356, a predetermined default value may be set in the blank to display a white button image.

In the first valid period (S1331), the second valid period (S1333), and the third valid period (S1335), even if no operation input is made by the player, the subsequent effect may be displayed. , Subsequent effects may be omitted and replaced with alternative effects for the rest of the period. As an alternative effect, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the effect, that is, an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the button notice effect is composed of a battle effect, if there is no operation of the effect button 109, an effect that the ally character and the enemy character are in competition and cannot win or lose is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button is displayed as it is. The final success / failure branch effect is reached without displaying the image or the subsequent effect. Further, for example, as an alternative effect to replace the normal subsequent effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or re-variable.

As a first application example of the button advance notice effect of this embodiment, the notification regarding the gaming state may be executed according to the number of button images accumulated in the effected area 675 during a certain period. The notification regarding the gaming state may be, for example, notification of the presence or absence of a probability change in a latent probability change state in which it is not clearly indicated whether or not the game state is a probability change state. In addition, in a gaming machine that has a latent probability change state with 150 symbol fluctuations as the final stage and a time reduction state with 75 symbol fluctuations as the final stage, when the number of time reductions reaches the 75th variation, the easy-to-enter state is maintained. Notification may be executed that incites whether or not to continue, that is, whether or not it is in a probabilistic state, in the form of "whether or not it is promoted to probabilistic change". Further, in such a case, depending on the game state (or the symbol that triggered the special game) after the end of the special game, the number of fluctuations in the symbol after the end of the special game depends on the number of changes. When the button notice effect is generated regularly by referring to a specific table once or multiple times (the number of references is set to be different depending on the game state), and the frequency of the button notice effect is low. By increasing the accumulation of button images according to the game state, the expectation level indicating the game state may be approached. In the easy-to-enter state, when the number of reserved balls is four, it becomes a super-shortening fluctuation and the super-shortening fluctuation is often continuous. In the super-shortening fluctuation, the execution frequency of the button effect tends to decrease, so it is executed as a so-called look-ahead effect. It may be configured to increase the number of produced button images in the notification that arouses whether or not it is in a probable change state by executing a button advance effect that multiplies lines over a plurality of fluctuations.

As a second application example of the button notice effect of this embodiment, when the number of button images accumulated in the effected area 675 reaches a specified number, a button image with a high expectation of a big hit, for example, a blue chance button You may change it to an image and switch to the display of the button image with high expectation of big hit at the next button notice effect. However, the button advance notice effect that can be switched may be limited to the type or timing of the button advance notice effect displayed during reach. When the standby state of the button advance notice effect using the chance button image is set, a predetermined flag may be set, and the effect determination table in which the button advance notice effect using the chance button image is likely to occur may be preferentially referred to. When the number of button images accumulated in the produced area 675 reaches a specified number and the hold contains a symbol variation with a high expectation of a big hit or a symbol variation corresponding to a jackpot, the expectation of a big hit is even higher. A button image (such as a large chance button image or a button image with a lever) may be made to stand by. As a modification, not according to the number of button notice effects, but according to the points on the effect acquired for each button notice effect (points are more likely to be accumulated for the high expectation button), a specific advance effect (for example, winning during reach). It may be a specification to promote the cut-in notice production before the branch). As for the points on the effect, more points may be obtained, such as 1.2 times to 3 times when the effect button 109 is pressed at a specific timing displayed on a predetermined indicator or the like. The points on the effect may be specified not only by pressing the effect button 109 but also by operating another designated button such as the cross key 110 to further increase the points.

As a third application example of the button advance notice effect of this embodiment, a predetermined effect may be executed when the number of button images stored in the effected area 675 reaches a predetermined number. For example, a character image corresponding to each type of button image is set, and when the specified number is reached by accumulating each type of button image, an effect using the character image corresponding to the type of the button image is executed. You may do so. The specified number may be set to the same number for each type of button image, or may be set to a separate number. If the numbers are separate, for example, 50 for normal button images, 20 for chance button images, and 10 for big chance button images. You may.

For example, when the number of normal button images reaches the specified number, at least one of multiple types of production, such as playing a song related to the corresponding character, shifting to the corresponding specific production stage, and notifying the jackpot in the hold. May be generated. However, depending on the effect status of the symbol change during execution, it may be generated from the next change. For example, if the timing when the specified number is accumulated is during the change of the big hit symbol, the execution of the predetermined effect may be canceled once. In that case, after one special game or a series of special games (continuous chan) is completed, it may be restarted from a state that is 1 to 3 less than the specified number (unless the hold is accumulated to some extent, the "big hit notification in hold" is given. "Cannot be implemented). When the number of chance button images reaches the specified number, the state suggestion of the current game setting may be executed. When the number of big chance button images reaches the specified number, a one-time complete notification effect (for example, an effect that announces that the button notice effect of the big chance button image will always be displayed in the next big hit pattern change). May be executed.

When the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit, if it is a normal button image, the number corresponding to the number of repeated hits or the number of a predetermined multiple may be accumulated. However, in the case of a chance button image or a large chance button image, the number may be fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 3) regardless of repeated hits of the effect buttons 109.

<7th Example>
This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, and are common. The explanation of the points to be performed will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of advance notice effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. A notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "button notice effect") that prompts the player to input an operation is displayed. In the button advance notice effect, a predetermined effect can be executed when the operation means is operated within the valid period of the operation input, and an indicator indicating the lapse of the valid period is displayed in the vicinity of the button image. As the button image, a plurality of types of button images having different display modes such as colors, patterns, and shapes are prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by which color, pattern, and shape of the button image is displayed. The height of is different. The button notice effect in this embodiment is premised on the fact that when the player presses the effect button 109 during the predetermined valid period while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined effect such as a pass / fail branch effect or a reach effect can be executed. The "predetermined effect" referred to here may be various reach effects or another notice effect such as a comment notice. Further, the "button notice effect" may be any of various effects using the button images shown in the first to sixth embodiments.

The effect determining means 303 may select one of a plurality of types of special effect patterns by lottery when the variation pattern of the variation time and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern are selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the button notice effect, the number of times of display, the display timing, the type of the button image, and the like.

FIG. 47 schematically shows a screen example of the button notice effect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 47 (a) shows a display mode of a standard indicator. As a general rule, in normal times, a standard indicator as shown in the figure indicates the passage of the valid period of the effect button 109. The standard indicator is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator, and the elapsed period is expressed by displaying how the amount indicated by the indicator (meter display or gauge display) decreases from right to left. Here, in the case where the execution of the button notice effect of the present embodiment is decided and the effect having a relatively high expectation of a big hit is displayed, in order to suggest the high expectation of the big hit, it is more than usual. The validity period is set to be long, and the passage of the validity period is expressed by one of the following eight special indicators having different display modes. Not only the type of the button image but also the display mode of the special indicator can suggest the high degree of expectation of the big hit. As a modification, the high degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested by the following eight special indicators without making the effective period longer than usual.

FIG. 47B schematically shows a first special example of the indicator. The indicator in the first special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator longer than the standard indicator of FIG. 47 (a), and it is suggested that the validity period is longer than usual or the jackpot expectation is high depending on the length. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the length of the indicator of the first special case may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. The indicator of the first special case is longer than the standard indicator, but the speed of decrease (or increase) of the value indicated by the indicator is the same as the standard indicator, so the longer the indicator, the longer the validity period. be able to.

FIG. 47 (c) schematically shows a second special example of the indicator. The indicator in the second special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator thicker than the standard indicator of FIG. 47 (a), and it is suggested that the validity period is longer than usual or the jackpot expectation is high depending on the thickness. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the thickness of the indicator of the second special case may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, the indicator of the second special example is thicker than the standard indicator, and the speed at which the value indicated by the indicator decreases (or increases) is slower than the standard indicator, indicating that the thicker the indicator, the longer the effective period. be able to.

FIG. 47 (d) schematically shows a third special example of the indicator. The indicator in the third special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator having a larger number than the standard indicator in FIG. 47 (a), and it is suggested that the validity period is longer than usual or the expectation of a big hit is high due to the large number of indicators. do. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the number of indicators of the third special example may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, since the indicator of the third special example has more than the standard indicator, the speed of decrease (or increase) of the value indicated by the indicator is slower than the standard indicator, indicating that the more the indicator, the longer the effective period. be able to. In addition, as an effect of increasing the number of indicators, an effect of accumulating (stocking) indicators may be executed in the pattern change in the foreground or the button notice effect.

FIG. 47 (e) schematically shows a fourth special example of the indicator. The indicator in the fourth special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator having a color different from that of the standard indicator of FIG. 47 (a), and it is suggested that the validity period is longer than usual or the expectation of a big hit is high due to the difference in color. .. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the color of the indicator of the fourth special case may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. Further, the color of the portion indicating the remaining time of the indicator may be changed according to the length of the period during which the player presses and holds the effect button 109 and the number of repeated hits. Alternatively, the color of the portion indicating the elapsed time of the indicator may be changed according to the length of the period during which the player presses and holds the effect button 109 and the number of repeated hits. As the color change, for example, it may change in the order of blue, green, yellow, and red, and it means that the effective period is longer as the color change progresses, and it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is higher by that amount. The chances of reaching color increase. In addition, the larger the number of colors or the wider the range of color changes, the longer it takes to change, so it can be shown that the effective period is longer.

FIG. 48 schematically shows a screen example of the button notice effect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 48A schematically shows a fifth special example of the indicator. The indicator in the fifth special case is also a horizontal bar-shaped indicator having a different color from the standard indicator in FIG. 47 (a), and it is suggested that the validity period is longer than usual due to the difference in color, and the expectation of big hit is high. do. However, the color changes in the reverse order from the fourth special case, for example, in the order of red, yellow, green, and blue, that is, the color with high expectation of big hit changes to the color with low expectation. The color of the part showing the elapsed time of the indicator is changed in such an order. The length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the color of the indicator of the fifth special case may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. Further, the color of the portion indicating the elapsed time of the indicator may be changed according to the length of the period during which the player presses and holds the effect button 109 and the number of repeated hits. The larger the number of colors or the wider the range of color changes, the longer it takes to change, so it can be shown that the effective period is longer.

FIG. 48B schematically shows a sixth special example of the indicator. The sixth special case is a modification of the third special case. The indicator in the sixth special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator having a larger number than the standard indicator in FIG. 47 (a), and it is suggested that the validity period is longer than usual or the expectation of a big hit is high due to the large number of indicators. do. However, unlike the third special example, the number of indicators is indicated by a number such as "x3", and the number of indicators displayed at the same time is one. For example, when a number such as "x3" indicates that there are three indicators, the number is reduced each time one indicator is consumed. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the number of indicators of the sixth special case may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, since the indicator of the sixth special case has more than the standard indicator, the speed of decrease (or increase) of the value indicated by the indicator is slower than the standard indicator, indicating that the more the indicator, the longer the effective period. be able to. In addition, as an effect of increasing the number of indicators, an effect of accumulating (stocking) indicators may be executed in the pattern change in the foreground or the button notice effect.

FIG. 48 (c) schematically shows a seventh special example of the indicator. The indicator in the 7th special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator that increases or decreases in a direction different from the standard indicator in FIG. 47 (a), suggesting that the validity period is longer than usual or the expectation of a big hit is high depending on the direction. do. In the standard indicator, the value indicated by the indicator decreases from right to left, whereas in the indicator of the 7th special case, the value indicated by the indicator decreases from left to right.

FIG. 48 (d) schematically shows an eighth special example of the indicator. The indicator in the eighth special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator having a longer digestion time than the standard indicator of FIG. 47 (a), and the effective period is longer than usual depending on the length of the digestion time, or the expectation of a big hit is high. Suggests. However, the indicator itself has the same appearance as the standard indicator, and when the player finishes digesting the indicator without pressing the effect button 109, the indicator starts digesting in the opposite direction so that it folds back (or flips). There is. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation, and the number of times that the indicator of the eighth special case can be folded back (or inverted) may be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, the indicator of the 8th special case has a longer digestion time than the standard indicator, and the speed of decrease (or increase) of the value indicated by the indicator is slower than the standard indicator, so that the longer the digestion time of the indicator is, the more effective it is. It can be shown that the period is long.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, an example of displaying the operation status with numbers, letters, indicators and the like has been described. In the modified example, a plurality of objects composed of figures or the like (objects may correspond to one object per operation count, or the number of operations may be different for each object display mode by different colors and shapes. The operation status may be displayed in a form in which the number of operations pointed to by (may be different) increases or the number of remaining operations decreases.

<Eighth Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first to seventh embodiments, and the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the characteristics of the eighth embodiment can be any combination with the characteristics of the prerequisite technology, the first to seventh embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variation effect pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, the operation on the effect button 109 is effective during one symbol variation based on the special effect pattern. The button effect including the period (hereinafter, also referred to as “button operation valid period”) is generated at least once (multiple times in the embodiment). In at least one button effect among the plurality of button effects, the post-operation effect is immediately output when a predetermined operation condition for the effect button 109 is satisfied. Further, in the above-mentioned at least one button effect, it is related to a specific effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "subsequent effect") executed in the subsequent variable effect depending on the remaining time of the button operation valid period when the button operation is input. Accumulates predetermined production elements (hereinafter also referred to as "accumulation elements"). The accumulation element is an effect element (for example, an image related to the content of the subsequent effect) for making the subsequent effect a mode showing that the expectation of the big hit is high, or the expectation of the big hit is high. It is an effect element for executing a subsequent effect to notify. Then, in the subsequent effect, the contents corresponding to the accumulated elements accumulated up to that point are displayed.

Specifically, the special effect pattern is defined to execute a preceding effect (pseudo continuous variation effect and button effect in the embodiment) including a button operation valid period, and an operation on the effect button 109 during the valid period in the preceding effect. When is input, it is stipulated that a predetermined element for executing a subsequent effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is accumulated based on the remaining period of the valid period. The effect display control means 305 displays the preceding effect when the effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern, and when the operation for the effect button 109 is input during the valid period in the preceding effect, the said effect display control means 305. The subsequent effect corresponding to the above-mentioned elements accumulated based on the remaining period of the valid period is displayed.

The subsequent effect in the present embodiment includes a timer notice with a content that suggests the timing at which the chance up (notice indicating that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the normal effect, promotion effect, etc.) is displayed by the timer image. When a button operation is performed in the button effect, the remaining time of the button operation valid period in the button effect is accumulated as a timer time, in other words, is added to the timer time. The timer time is the time until it becomes 0 after being subtracted in the timer notice, and becomes longer according to the remaining time.

FIG. 49 schematically shows the production process in the special production of the eighth embodiment. The production process of the special effect is defined in the above-mentioned special effect pattern. The special effect of the eighth embodiment is an effect displayed during one symbol variation execution, and includes a pseudo continuous variation effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”) of the decorative symbol 506. In the pseudo-ream effect, a plurality of decorative symbols 506 (including the pseudo-ream symbol described later) are displayed as if they were temporarily stopped (also referred to as a pause) in one symbol change, so that the pseudo-ream effect can be simulated multiple times. It is a production that makes it look like it was executed. The temporary stop may be a state in which the decorative symbol 506 or the pseudo-continuous symbol is not completely stationary and is slightly shaken. The pseudo-ream in the special effect of the eighth embodiment includes two temporary stops, and the variable effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol 506 to the first temporary stop is also called "pseudo 1 effect", and from the first temporary stop. The variable effect up to the second temporary stop is also called "pseudo 2 effect", and the variable effect from the second temporary stop until the reach is formed and the timer notice is started is also called "pseudo 3 effect".

The pseudo 1 effect includes the button 1 effect which is the first button effect, the pseudo 2 effect includes the button 2 effect which is the second button effect, and the pseudo 3 effect includes the button 3 which is the third button effect. Including production. Each button effect includes a content that encourages whether or not the symbol variation continues, and also includes a content that urges the player to operate the effect button 109.

For example, the button effect is a symbol indicating the continuation of the symbol variation (for example, "NEXT") between the tempered decorative symbols 506 (also referred to as "reach symbol") by one button operation, and is a "pseudo". It may be a production (so to speak, a one-shot push production) that incites whether or not the "continuous pattern") is stopped. Further, the button effect may be an effect (so to speak, a continuous hit effect) that displays "defeat the enemy and grab the NEXT" or the like and encourages the effect button 109 to be repeatedly hit. Further, the button effect may be an effect (so to speak, a long press effect) that displays "Energy is stored in the NETXT logo (pseudo-continuous pattern logo)" and urges the effect button 109 to be pressed for a long time. Further, the button effect may be such that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped at the timing indicating that the result of the operation for the effect button 109 is successful, or at the end of the operation valid period for the effect button 109.

In the special effect of the eighth embodiment, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped, the difference between the variable display time of the special symbol and the effect scale of the variable effect based on the change of the effect mode based on the button operation is absorbed. The decoration symbol 506 does not wait for fluctuations, but immediately decorates after performing the effect for a predetermined time (display of pseudo-continuous symbols, display of temporary stop, display of contents indicating continuation of symbol fluctuations, etc.). The fluctuation of the symbol 506 is restarted. That is, a plurality of types of effects during one fluctuation are displayed at an earlier timing as the input of the button operation becomes faster, in other words, the earlier the result display of the button effect becomes. As shown in FIG. 49, in the special effect of the eighth embodiment, after three pseudo-reams, the super reach effect as the subsequent effect described above is executed. The super reach effect includes a timer notice that starts a timer (for example, a countdown) when the super reach develops and displays a chance up when the timer reaches "0". In this embodiment, the case where the timer effect is started after the reach is formed has been described, but even in the variable effect pattern in which the "pseudo 3 effect" is performed, the pseudo 2 effect is being executed or the pseudo 3 effect is being executed. It may be a specification to start the timer notice in the state where the production is being executed and before the reach is reached.

In FIG. 49A, the effect button 109 is pressed at the latest timing in each of the button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect, that is, when the button operation valid period of the effect button 109 expires (immediately before the expiration). The length of the timer notice in the case (or when the condition for long-pressing the effect button 109 or the condition for the number of repeated hits is satisfied) is shown. Further, FIG. 49B shows the length of the timer notice when the effect button 109 is pressed at the earliest timing in each of the button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect. The timer notice of the special effect shown in FIG. 49 (b) is the remaining time of the button operation valid period in each of the button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect from the timer notice of the special effect shown in FIG. 49 (a). In this example, it is approximately equal to the button operation validity period). In the example of FIG. 49, in order to simplify the explanation, it is shown that the button effect is executed from the beginning of the pseudo 1 effect, the pseudo 2 effect, and the pseudo 3 effect. The specification may be such that the button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect are executed after or at the same time as the advance notice effect (described later with reference to FIG. 50).

The effect display control means 305 determines the time value of the timer (that is, the time from the start of the timer when the super reach develops to the chance up display) as well as the fact that the timer is waiting from the start of the special effect to the end of the pseudo 3 effect. It is displayed on the effect display device 60. As the timer time value (that is, the initial value of the timer time value) at the start of the timer display, the time value when the button operation is the latest is set as shown in FIG. 49 (a).

The effect display control means 305 (may be the effect determination means 303, the same applies hereinafter) displays the result of the button effect (for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol in FIG. 49 is displayed), and sets the remaining time of the button operation valid period as the timer time value up to that point. Add to. By increasing the displayed timer time value in this way, it seems that the expectation of the big hit is high, and the expectation of the player can be increased. Further, it becomes easy to change the timer time value that can be stocked depending on the button operation mode accepted in each of the button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect. For example, since it is easier to stock more time in the one-shot effect than in the continuous hit effect and the long press effect, in each of the button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect, depending on the timer time value to be stocked. The button operation mode may be defined.

FIG. 50 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 50A shows the display timing and display mode of the button image 500. FIG. 50 (b) shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the special effect. FIG. 50 (c) shows the output period and timing of the audio effect and its length. FIG. 50 (d) shows the lighting timing and the length, lighting color, or lighting mode of the lamp device (also referred to as “button lamp”) provided in the vicinity of the effect button 109 main body or the effect button 109 on the housing. show. FIG. 50 (e) shows the timing and length of the operation valid period for the effect button 109. FIG. 50 (f) shows the operation timing and operation mode for the effect button 109. In the description in this figure, in order to simplify the explanation, the button effect is not a continuous hit effect or a long press effect, but is described by a button effect that progresses by one button operation.

In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the pseudo 1 effect of S1400 is first started. Although not shown, it is shown that the timer is waiting (specifically, the timer image and the timer time value indicating waiting) during the execution period of the pseudo 1 effect to the pseudo 3 effect (that is, the period before the start of the timer notice). indicate. The standby display of the timer may be started after the pseudo 2 effect, or may be started after the button operation input of the button effect executed during the fluctuation, and is successful in any of the button 1 effect to the button 3 effect. It may be started when displaying the result indicating.

During the pseudo 1 effect, the button 1 effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1401). When the button 1 effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1420) to the valid state (S1421). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1440) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1430). In the case of a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the button lamp may emit light in an manner indicating that the expectation is high (red, blinking, etc.). Further, in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the button image may be displayed in a special manner, and the button lamp may be made to emit light in a manner matching the button image. For example, when displaying a red button image as a special aspect, the button lamp may be made to emit red light. Further, when displaying a button image of a giraffe pattern as a special mode, the button lamp may be made to emit light in a mode in which orange and yellow are combined.

The player inputs a button operation before the end of the button 1 effect (in other words, with the button operation valid period remaining) (S1450). When the button operation is on-edge (that is, when the input of the button operation is detected by the sensor), the effective period of the button operation ends and the button lamp is turned off. When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound indicating that the button operation has been accepted (S1460).

Further, when the button operation is input in the button 1 effect, the effect display control means 305 does not execute the effect for scale adjustment such as the standby display due to the longer shaking fluctuation of the decorative symbol 506 than usual, and immediately performs the decorative symbol. The temporary stop of 506 and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (S1402). Further, the effect display control means 305 increases the time value of the waiting timer according to the remaining time of the button operation valid period. The voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined addition sound for notifying that the timer time value has been added (S1461). Although not shown, an image display effect related to the addition of the timer time value or an effect using a decorative lamp may be executed.

The addition sound may be switched to a special voice indicating that the longer the time to add to the timer time value, that is, the longer the remaining time of the button operation valid period, the higher the expectation. Further, a special sound effect may be output when the total addition time to the timer time value (total of three button effects) exceeds the reference value. For example, when the addition time reaches 3 seconds, 6 seconds, or 9 seconds, a special voice indicating a chance up may be output.

After the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, after the shaking variation display for 1 second), the variation of the decorative symbol 506 is immediately restarted, and the process shifts to the pseudo 2 effect (S1403). During the pseudo 2 effect, the button 2 effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1404). When the button 2 effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1422) to the valid state (S1423). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1441) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1431).

The player inputs a button operation before the end of the button 2 effect (in other words, with the button operation valid period remaining) (S1451). When the button operation is on-edge, the button operation valid period ends and the button lamp is turned off. When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs an operation sound (S1462). The effect display control means 305 immediately displays the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-continuous symbol (S1405), and increases the time value of the waiting timer according to the remaining time of the button operation valid period. The voice control means 306 outputs an added sound (S1463).

Immediately after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 506 is restarted, and the process shifts to the pseudo 3 effect (S1406). During the pseudo 3 effect, the button 3 effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1407). When the button 3 effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1424) to the valid state (S1425). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1442) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1432).

The player inputs a button operation before the end of the button 3 effect (in other words, with the button operation valid period remaining) (S1452). When the button operation is on-edge, the button operation valid period ends and the button lamp is turned off. When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs an operation sound (S1464). The effect display control means 305 displays a development suggestion effect indicating the result of whether or not it develops into super reach (S1408), and increases the time value of the standby timer according to the remaining time of the button operation valid period. .. The voice control means 306 outputs an added sound (S1465).

Subsequently, the effect display control means 305 displays the super reach effect as the subsequent effect (S1409). The effect display control means 305 starts the timer notice in the super reach effect, and gives the timer notice until the timer time value (initial value + increase) accumulated between the button 1 effect and the button 3 effect elapses. Display (S1410). The timer notice may be content that suggests the time when the chance-up effect occurs, such as a character cut-in or a battle. The effect display control means 305 displays the winning branch in the super reach effect after the timer notice ends.

FIG. 51 is also a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the eighth embodiment. Similar to FIG. 50 (b), the figure shows the timing, length and content of a plurality of effect periods constituting the special effect. The production of S1400 to S1409 in the figure corresponds to the production of S1400 to S1409 in 50 (b).

The figure shows the effect process when the player does not input the button operation, and corresponds to the latest pattern shown in FIG. 49 (a). In the figure, since each of the button 1 effect (S1401), the button 2 effect (S1404), and the button 3 effect (S1407) is displayed for the maximum time, the timer time value does not increase and remains as the initial value. Therefore, the display time of the timer notice (S1410) in the super reach effect (S1409) is shorter than the timer notice of FIG. 50 (b).

However, the time of the entire special effect is the same in FIGS. 50 and 51, and the end timing of the timer notice on the time axis of the entire special effect is also the same in FIGS. 50 and 51. That is, in the example of FIG. 50, since the button operation was input before the button operation valid period elapsed, the remaining time of the button operation valid period was added to the timer time value. As a result, the timer notice shown in FIG. 50 is started earlier than the timer notice shown in FIG. 51 and is continued for a longer time.

Next, an example of the lottery process (effect content determination process) of the special effect pattern by the effect determination means 303 in this embodiment will be described. The production determination means 303 first executes a scenario lottery. In the scenario lottery, according to the hit / fail judgment result, the symbol judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result transmitted from the main board 200, the effect pattern in which the number of pseudo-reams + the timer advance notice is determined (the advance notice effect generated during each pseudo change). A "scenario") that defines the combination can be selected by lottery. When the effect determining means 303 selects a scenario in which the number of pseudo-reams + timer notice is specified, (a) the type of reach effect and (b) the type and number of chance-up effects during reach effect (target of timer notice). (C) Which of the multiple patterns of the extension time of the timer notice due to the advancement of the reach effect can appear is further determined by lottery. The number of simulated effects (which may be the number of temporary stops) may also be determined by another lottery after the scenario lottery. Further, the plurality of patterns of the extension time of the timer notice may include +8 seconds and +12 seconds (or 8 seconds of insertion effect 1 and 12 seconds of insertion effect 2).

When the scenario of two simulated effects is determined and the pattern of the extension time of the timer notice is determined to be "+8 seconds", the effect determining means 303 is the button 1 effect of the pseudo 1 effect and the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect. You may select a button effect that can increase the timer time value by +8 seconds in total. Specifically, when the shortest time for each of the repeated hits and the long press is set to 1 second in the button operation mode, the continuous hitting effect in which the button operation valid period of the effect button 109 is 5 seconds is determined as the button 1 effect, and the button 2 effect is performed. As a result, a long-pressed effect in which the button operation valid period of the effect button 109 is 7 seconds may be determined. Then, when the player operates in a manner in which the timer time can be added by 8 seconds when executing the effect, the player controls to execute the insertion effect 1 when executing the reach effect, and when the timer time cannot be added by 8 seconds. , To absorb and digest the time until the chance-up effect, which is the target of the timer notice, by delaying the playback time and frame switching timing of the predetermined effect image (one or more loop images) during the reach effect. It is composed of.

Generally, the longer the time measured in the timer notice (that is, the timer time value), the higher the expectation of a big hit. According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, the subsequent effects are executed ahead of schedule according to the timing of the button operations in the multiple button effects, and the timer advance time is extended by the amount of the advance, so the expectation of a big hit. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the higher the degree, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to encourage the player to actively input the button operation, in other words, to actively participate in the button effect.

The first modification will be described. The effect control means 304 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a function (auto button function, hereinafter referred to as “automatic operation means”) for automatically inputting an operation for the effect button 109 during the button operation valid period according to a setting by the player. You may prepare. In this case, if the automatic operation is enabled, the operation will be completed much faster than when the player manually operates the button, and the timer time value may be longer than the developer expected. be. Therefore, during the special effect (particularly the button effect) to which the timer time value is added in the eighth embodiment, the effect control means 304 disables the automatic operation function regardless of the setting by the player, and the player manually performs the effect. You may request the button operation by. According to this aspect, it is possible to provide the benefit of extending the timer time value to the player who actually operates the effect button 109 by his / her own hand and participates in the button effect. In addition, the effect display control means 305 of this modification displays an image (such as a message or icon of "auto button is disabled") indicating that the automatic operation is disabled, so that the player can manually operate the button. You may urge.

The second modification will be described. As the button operation effective time in the button effect, a time according to the operation mode may be set. For example, the effective time for button operation may be set to 3 seconds for a button effect requesting a single press, 5 seconds for a button effect requesting repeated hits, and 5 seconds for a button effect requesting a long press. When the shortest time for each of repeated hits and long presses is set to 1 second among the button operation modes, it is possible to shorten the total time by 12 seconds by three button effects. Therefore, 3 patterns of reach effects including timer notice (for example, timer notice is base time pattern A, timer notice is base time + 8 seconds pattern B, timer notice is base time + 12 seconds pattern C) are stored and displayed. The control means 305 may select a reach effect pattern (for example, any of the above A to C) in which the time of the timer advance notice is increased by the shortened time in the button effect.

As another aspect, the effect display control means 305 executes one reach effect in which the timer notice is set to the base time, and further, the insertion timer notice of 4 seconds + 1 second for scale absorption (for example, next notice, background effect). Etc.) may be executed once or twice depending on the length of time shortened in the button effect to absorb the time reduction in the button effect. The value added to the timer time value at the time of button operation input may be a rounded value. For example, in a button effect (continuous hitting) with a button operation valid period of "5 seconds", when the target number of button presses is achieved "3.2 seconds after" from the start (the rest is "1.8 seconds"), a timer The time value may be set to "+2 seconds". In this case, the difference of "0.2 seconds" may be absorbed by shortening the shaking fluctuation in the pseudo-ream by that amount.

A third modification will be described. In the above embodiment, the timer time value is added for each pseudo-ream (button effect), but as a step-up button effect, the button operation valid period is added for each pseudo-ream (button effect), and the final button effect (? For example, the remaining time of the button operation valid period in the button 3 effect) may be added to the timer time value.

FIG. 52 schematically shows a button effect of a modified example. 52 (a) shows the button 1 effect of the pseudo 1 effect 730, FIG. 52 (b) shows the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect 732, and FIG. 52 (c) shows the button 3 effect of the pseudo 3 effect 734. ing. Each button effect includes a button image 500 and a lifetime indicator 736. Further, the remaining time 738 in each button effect indicates the remaining time of the button operation valid period at the time of button operation input (in the case of repeated hits and long presses, when the target is achieved). The effect display control means 305 shortens the length display of the remaining time 738 as the button effect continues, in other words, as the button operation valid period decreases.

The effect display control means 305 of this modification sets the button operation valid period in the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect 732 to a value obtained by adding the remaining time 738 in the button 1 effect of the pseudo 1 effect 730 to a predetermined initial value. do. Further, the effect display control means 305 sets the button operation valid period in the button 3 effect of the pseudo 3 effect 734 to a value obtained by adding the remaining time 738 in the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect 732 to a predetermined initial value. Then, the effect display control means 305 adds the remaining time 738 in the button 3 effect of the pseudo 3 effect 734 to the timer time value.

The longer the remaining time of the button operation valid period, the longer the display (remaining time) corresponding to the time added to the timer time value, and as a result, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the effect display control means 305 may change the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the remaining time 738 according to the length of the remaining time 738. For example, the first threshold value, the second threshold value, and the third threshold value are set stepwise from the one with the shorter remaining time, and the effect display control means 305 sets the remaining time 738 from the blue of the initial mode when the remaining time becomes the first threshold value or more. It may be changed to green, the remaining time 738 may be changed from green to orange when the remaining time becomes the second threshold value or more, and the remaining time 738 may be changed from orange to red when the remaining time becomes the third threshold value or more. Further, when the variable effect results in a big hit, the effect display control means 305 displays the remaining time 738 in a special mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating a big hit with a predetermined probability (when the effect lottery is won). You may let me.

A fourth modification will be described. As described in the eighth embodiment, the effect display control means 305 displays the timer time value at the time of executing the pseudo 1 effect to the pseudo 3 effect. Further, in the aspect of the third modification, the timer time value is not added to the pseudo-people, and the timer time value is displayed as the initial value (in other words, the base time). In any of the embodiments, the initial value is displayed in advance before the start of the reach effect (timekeeping start of the timer effect). Therefore, when the initial value of the timer time value is short, the player uses the timer. There is a possibility that the special production will be less interesting because it is expected that the notice time will be short, that is, it will be easy to miss. Therefore, the effect display control means 305 displays an effect that determines the initial value of the timer time value (that is, the value before addition) at the timing after the end of the pseudo-continuous effect and before the reach effect (before the development of super reach). May be good. In other words, such a production process may be defined in a special production pattern.

The effect display control means 305 of this modification may execute a button effect that determines the initial value of the timer time value in the development fanning effect before the reach effect, for example, in S1408 of FIG. 50 (b). The fourth button effect may be executed. When the fourth button effect is a one-shot effect, the effect display control means 305 changes the initial value of the timer time value like a roulette wheel, and displays the initial value of the timer time value when the button is pressed. You may do it. Further, when the fourth button effect is a number-pressed effect, the effect display control means 305 causes the button operation for the number of times corresponding to the number of digits of the time to be input, and the time of each digit is stepwise according to the button operation. You may execute the effect to be displayed. Further, the effect of notifying the initial value of the timer time value may be executed immediately after the start of the reach effect.

Furthermore, when the fourth button effect is a long press effect, the effect display control means 305 counts up the initial value of the timer time value according to the time when the effect button 109 is long pressed within the valid period. You may execute the effect to be displayed. Furthermore, when the fourth button effect is a continuous hit effect, the effect display control means 305 increases the initial value of the timer time value by a predetermined unit amount according to the repeated hits (for example, the number of times the effect button 109 is pressed). You may let me. Alternatively, if the valid period of 10 seconds is displayed and the repeated hits are successful after 10 seconds have elapsed (for example, if the number of times the effect button 109 is pressed is a predetermined number of times or more), the initial value of the timer time value may be increased. ..

The effect display control means 305 is a value added to the initial value of the timer time value, that is, the value accumulated in the button 1 effect to the button 3 effect is displayed on standby in the vicinity of the image indicating that the timer is being prepared. You may. Then, when the initial value of the timer time value is determined or at the timing immediately before the timer starts to be timed, an additional amount may be added and displayed to the initial value.

Further, the effect display control means 305 proliferates the timer (increases the number of timer images) in response to the pressing of the effect button 109 when determining (displaying) the initial value of the timer time value. May be good. The proliferating timer is a timer that targets a timer that is later than the timer notice based on the timer that was initially displayed. For example, the effect display control means 305 initially displays a timer of 20 seconds, and when a new timer is generated for a notice after 5 seconds, a 25-second timer (with the initial timer notice) is used as a new timer. Simultaneous start) may be displayed. Alternatively, a 5-second timer (started after the end of the initial timer notice) may be displayed as a new timer.

A fifth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the timer time value becomes 0 in the timer notice, the chance up is displayed. As a modification, the effect display control means 305 may notify the jackpot when the timer time value becomes 0, that is, the effect content may be defined in the special effect pattern. Further, when the effect display control means 305 notifies the jackpot before the timer time value becomes 0, it is promoted when the timer time value becomes 0 (promotion from normal jackpot to jackpot with probability variation, number of prize balls). You may display an effect to notify you of promotion to a big hit with a larger expected value, promotion to a big hit with a longer duration of easy entry, etc., that is, the content of the effect is specified in the special effect pattern. You may.

The sixth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, as a special effect pattern including the button effect and the timer notice, the timer time value is extended according to the button operation timing (in other words, the start of the subsequent effect is advanced). And a second special effect pattern that does not extend the timer time value regardless of the button operation timing may be provided. The effect determining means 303 may select the first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern with a predetermined probability (by lottery) according to the lottery result of the main board 200. The first special effect pattern defines the content indicating that the result of the timer notice is successful (chance up), while the second special effect pattern defines the content indicating that the result of the timer notice is unsuccessful (no chance up). It is also good.

<9th Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first to eighth embodiments, and the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the characteristics of the ninth embodiment can be any combination with the characteristics of the prerequisite technology, the first to eighth embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variation effect pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a preceding effect including a button operation valid period during one symbol variation based on the special effect pattern. To generate. In the preceding effect, the effect development suggestion image is displayed by pressing the effect button 109. The effect development suggestion image may be an image of an aspect suggesting that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Further, the effect development suggestion image may be an image in a mode that suggests the result of the hit / fail judgment or the effect content. It may be an image of an aspect of the above. Then, the execution pattern of the development destination / post-development effect content (also referred to as “successor effect”) is changed according to the operation mode of the effect button 109 at the time when the effect development suggestion image is displayed.

Specifically, the special effect pattern is a preceding effect including a button operation valid period, and when an operation for the effect button 109 is input during that period, a special image suggesting the development of the effect is displayed. It is decided to carry out the production. Further, the special effect pattern is defined to have different contents of the subsequent effect indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit, depending on the operation mode input to the effect button 109 during the display period of the special image. The effect display control means 305 displays the preceding effect when the effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern, and when the operation for the effect button 109 is input during the button operation valid period in the preceding effect. Display a special image on. The effect display control means 305 displays subsequent effects having different contents according to the operation mode input to the effect button 109 during the display period of the special image.

Hereinafter, the effect executed based on the special effect pattern, and the effect including the above-mentioned preceding effect and the subsequent effect, is also referred to as a “special effect”. FIG. 53 schematically shows a screen transition example of the special effect in the ninth embodiment. In particular, FIG. 53 shows the screen transition of the button effect-related portion in the special effect. First, in the front effect 710 corresponding to the preceding effect, the button image 500 is displayed as the button effect to urge the player to operate the effect button 109. A message to the player such as "press the button!" May also be displayed. When the effect button 109 is pressed in the foreground effect 710, the symbol variation is temporarily stopped and the developed symbol (corresponding to the above special image) is temporarily stopped as the central symbol, as shown in the foreground effect 711. The development symbol may be a pseudo-continuous symbol, or may be a production development image related to reach or the like (for example, a symbol showing development to super reach).

In the special effect pattern of the embodiment, the button operation can be accepted even during the development symbol display shown in the foreground effect 711 (for example, during the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol), in other words, the button operation valid period continues. Then, the subsequent subsequent effects are branched depending on the operation mode for the effect button 109 during the development symbol display, and in this example, the subsequent effects are branched into one of the post-development effect 712a, the post-development effect 712b, and the post-development effect 712c.

For example, (1) if the operation for the effect button 109 is not input during the development symbol display, the process shifts to the post-development effect 712a including the one-shot effect of the effect button 109. (2) When the button operation for the effect button 109 is input again during the development symbol display (or when the button operation is input more than a predetermined number of times as the continuous striking operation), the post-development effect including the continuous striking effect of the effect button 109 It is transferred to 712b. (3) When a long press operation for the effect button 109 is input during the development symbol display (or when the effect button 109 is continuously pressed from the time when the front effect 710 is displayed), the effect of long press of the effect button 109 is included. After the development, it will be transferred to the production 712c. The transition condition to the post-development effect 712a of (1) may be satisfied when both the transition condition of (2) and the transition condition of (3) are not achieved.

Further, the process in which each of the transition condition (2) and the transition condition (3) is satisfied may be displayed on the screen. For example, when a button repeated hit operation is accepted during the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" in the front effect 711, the character color of "NEXT" is changed to another color one by one each time the button is pressed. It may suggest a transition to the production 712b. In addition, when the button long press operation is accepted during the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" in the front effect 711, the character color of "NEXT" is gradually changed from the bottom to the top with the long press. May suggest a transition to post-development production 712c. On the other hand, when the continuous hitting effect of the post-development effect 712b and the long press effect of the post-development effect 712c are used as the back button effect, the lighting mode of the button lamp is replaced with the display mode of the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". The process in which each of the transition condition (2) and the transition condition (3) is satisfied may be presented depending on the output mode of the voice and the sound.

The post-development effect 712a's one-shot effect is an effect in which the result is displayed by pressing the effect button 109 once. The displayed result may be, for example, a hit / fail determination result, a temporary stop of a pseudo-ream symbol, or a roulette result (may include eyes such as big hit, miss, pseudo-ream, and effect development). The continuous striking effect of the post-development effect 712b is an effect in which the result is displayed by the continuous striking of the effect button 109. For example, the continuous hitting effect may be an effect of notifying a big hit when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time limit and is achieved, and is an effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbol. May be good. The long-pressed effect of the post-development effect 712c is an effect in which the result is displayed by the long-pressed operation of the effect button 109. For example, the long press effect may be an effect of notifying a big hit when the energy gauge is full and the energy is accumulated in the energy gauge as the button press time continues for a long time. It may be an effect of stopping.

FIG. 54 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the ninth embodiment. 54 (a) to 54 (f) correspond to FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (f). This figure shows the production process from the front effect 710 to the post-development effect 712a in FIG. 53. In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the front effect of S1500 is first started. In the foreground effect, the button effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1501, the foreground effect 710 in FIG. 53). When the button effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1510) to the valid state (first valid period in the figure) (S1511). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1530) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1520).

The player inputs a button operation (here, presses once) during the button effect display (S1540). When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1550). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500 and temporarily stops the development symbol (S1502, front effect 711 in FIG. 53). In the special effect illustrated in this figure, the button operation valid period continues as the back button effect even after the button operation input of S1540 (second valid period of S1512). The effect display control means 305 continues the white light emission of the button lamp even after the button image 500 is hidden. As a modification, as a continuation mode of the button operation valid period, a very short button operation invalid period is provided between the first valid period and the second valid period, and the button operation valid period is generally continued. It may be configured as follows.

In the example of this figure, the player does not operate the effect button 109 during the temporary stop of the developed symbol (that is, within the second valid period). The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the display of the development symbol is completed (S1503). The effect display control means 305 displays a one-shot pressing effect as a button effect in the post-development effect (post-development effect 712a in FIG. 53) (S1504). When the one-shot pressing effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1513) to the valid state (S1514). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1531) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1521).

The player inputs a button operation (here, presses once) during the one-shot push effect display (S1541). When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1551). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500, turns off the button lamp, and displays the effect as a result of the button operation (S1505). In the one-shot push effect in the post-development effect, when the button operation is performed once, the button operation is switched from the valid state to the invalid state (S1515).

FIG. 55 is also a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the ninth embodiment. FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (f) correspond to FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (f). This figure shows the production process from the front effect 710 to the post-development effect 712b in FIG. 53. In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the front effect of S1600 is first started. In the foreground effect, the button effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1601, foreground effect 710 in FIG. 53). When the button effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1610) to the valid state (first valid period in the figure) (S1611). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1630) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1620).

The player inputs a button operation (here, presses once) during the button effect display (S1640). When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1650). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500 and temporarily stops the development symbol (S1602, front effect 711 in FIG. 53). In the special effect illustrated in this figure, the button operation valid period continues as the back button effect even after the button operation input of S1640 (second valid period of S1612). The effect display control means 305 continues the white light emission of the button lamp even after the button image 500 is hidden.

In the example of this figure, the player presses the effect button 109 once during the temporary stop of the developed symbol (that is, within the second valid period) (S1641). It should be noted that the button operations of both S1640 and S1641 may be input while the player repeatedly hits the effect button 109. When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1651). In order to emphasize that the sound effect of S1651 is a back button, at least one of the size, height, and tone is different from the operation sound of S1650, but as a modification, the same sound as the operation sound of S1650. But it may be. As in the modification described above, a very short button operation invalid period (or a valid period but invalidating the effect switching) is arranged between the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. If the method is adopted, even if the button operations S1640 and S1641 are continuous in an extremely short period, the sound effects S1650 and S1651 are generated in the overlapping period, and the player who does not know the back button effect stops the development symbol. It is also possible to prevent the misunderstanding that "a special sound effect (S1651) has been reproduced (maybe the expectation of a big hit is high)" at times. Further, in order to avoid the same problem, regarding the satisfaction of the button operation condition in the second operation period in this example, the effect (sound effect S1651 etc.) is not immediately executed after the condition is satisfied, and the user is made to wait for a predetermined period. , The effect may be executed after waiting until a specific timing.

The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the display of the development symbol is completed (S1603). The effect display control means 305 displays a continuous striking effect as a button effect in the post-development effect (post-development effect 712b in FIG. 53) (S1604). When the continuous striking effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1613) to the valid state (S1614). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1631) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1621). The continuous hitting effect display period and the button operation valid period (S1604, S1614) are longer than the one-shot effect display period and the button operation valid period (S1504, S1514 in FIG. 54).

The player inputs a button operation during the continuous striking effect display (here, the continuous striking operation) (S1642). When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1652). When the target in the continuous hitting effect (for example, pressing the button more than a predetermined number of times) is achieved, the effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500, turns off the button lamp, and displays the result effect of the button operation (S1605). ). Then, the button operation is switched from the valid state to the invalid state (S1615).

FIG. 56 is also a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the ninth embodiment. 56 (a) to 56 (f) correspond to FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (f). This figure shows the production process from the front effect 710 to the post-development effect 712c in FIG. 53. In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the front effect of S1700 is first started. In the foreground effect, the button effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1701, the foreground effect 710 in FIG. 53). When the button effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1710) to the valid state (first valid period in the figure) (S1711). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1730) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1720).

The player inputs a button operation (here, long press) (S1740) during the button effect display. When the input of the button operation is detected, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1750). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500 and temporarily stops the development symbol (S1702, front effect 711 in FIG. 53). In the special effect illustrated in this figure, the button operation valid period continues as the back button effect even after the button operation input of S1740 (second valid period of S1712). The effect display control means 305 continues the white light emission of the button lamp even after the button image 500 is hidden.

In the example of this figure, the player continues to press the effect button 109 (that is, long press) even during the temporary stop of the developed symbol (that is, within the second valid period). When the condition of long-pressing the button (for example, the button-pressed state continues for a predetermined time or longer) is satisfied in the second valid period, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1751). In order to emphasize that the sound effect of S1751 is a back button, at least one of the size, height, and tone is different from the operation sound of S1750, but as a modification, the same sound as the operation sound of S1750. But it may be.

The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the display of the development symbol is completed (S1703). The effect display control means 305 displays a long-press effect as a button effect in the post-development effect (post-development effect 712c in FIG. 53) (S1704). The condition for shifting to the post-development effect including the long press effect may be that the effect button 109 is continuously pressed for the entire period of the second valid period. Further, the total time during which the effect button 109 is pressed during the second valid period may be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. In the latter case, the effect display control means 305 may display an effect in which energy is gradually stored in the energy gauge as the button is pressed continuously during the second effective period. Furthermore, if the total time during which the effect button 109 is pressed during the second valid period is less than the above threshold value, the process may shift to the post-development effect 712b including the continuous striking effect.

When the long press effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1713) to the valid state (S1714). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1731) and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1721). The long-press effect display period and its button operation valid period (S1704, S1714) are longer than the one-shot effect display period and its button operation valid period (S1504, S1514 in FIG. 54).

The player inputs a button operation during the long press effect display (here, a long press operation) (S1741). When the button operation is input, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1752). When the target in the long press effect (for example, the button pressed state continues for a predetermined time or longer) is achieved, the effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500, turns off the button lamp, and produces the result of the button operation. Is displayed (S1705). Then, the button operation is switched from the valid state to the invalid state (S1715).

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the ninth embodiment, when a development image (the above-mentioned development pattern) suggesting the development of the effect is suggested by the operation on the effect button 109, the operation mode for the effect button 109 while the development image is displayed. This allows the player to arbitrarily select the post-development production mode. As a result, the content of the variable effect can be adjusted according to the taste of the player, and the overall interest of the variable effect can be enhanced.

Further, during the display of the developed image, it is not clearly shown on the effect display device 60 that the button operation is effective, and the button operation for selecting the effect mode after the development is set as the back button operation. It is possible to add an element of inclusion and enhance the interest of the game. When the button operation of the first valid period for displaying the developed image is repeated or long-pressed, the button operation of the second valid period following the first valid period is the second, even if the player does not intend. 1 There is a possibility that it will be input in the flow (inertia) of the player operation during the valid period. Therefore, it is preferable that the button operation during the first valid period for displaying the developed image is a single press (single press).

The first modification will be described. In the above embodiment, as the back button effect, the operation for the effect button 109 is accepted while the button operation valid period (second valid period) is not clearly indicated on the screen during the temporary stop of the development symbol. As a modification, it may be clearly shown on the screen that the button operation is valid for the button operation valid period (second valid period) even during the temporary stop of the developed symbol. For example, the effect display control means 305 may display the button image 500 on the screen during the temporary stop of the development symbol, or may display an indicator image indicating the length of the second valid period. Further, the operation of selecting the effect mode after development in the second valid period may be configured by using another operation input device (cross key 110 or the like) instead of the operation of the effect button 109.

A second modification will be described. In the above embodiment, the post-development effect is branched into one of a plurality of types of button effects. As a modification, at least one of the branch destinations in the post-development effect may be other than the button effect.

A third modification will be described. The special effect pattern that can be selected by the effect determining means 303 is even if there is no button operation during the second valid period (in other words, even if the transition condition to the continuous hit effect and the long press effect is not satisfied. ), An exceptional special effect pattern that shifts to a post-development effect including a continuous hit effect or a long press effect may be included. In the effect determination table referred to by the effect determination means 303, the selection probability of the special effect pattern that shifts to the post-development effect including the continuous hit effect or the long press effect when there is no button operation in the second effective period is set in the second effective period. It may be set lower than the selection probability of the special effect pattern that shifts to the post-development effect including the one-shot effect when there is no button operation.

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the effect display control means 305 may emit (light) the button lamp in different modes in each of the one-shot effect, the continuous hit effect, and the long-press effect, and the color of the light emission and the like. The pattern may be different. For example, the button lamp may be made to emit white light in the one-shot effect, the button lamp may be emitted in yellow in the continuous hit effect, and the button lamp may be emitted in orange in the long-press effect. When the expectation of a big hit is high (or when the big hit is confirmed), a common mode (for example, red or giraffe color (yellow)) suggesting that is used in any of the one-shot effect, the continuous hit effect, and the long press effect. + Orange)) may be used to make the button lamp emit light.

A fifth modification will be described. In the foreground effect, instead of displaying the development symbol according to the button operation, a roulette image or the like may be displayed and the stop pattern thereof may be changed according to the button operation mode. For example, the effect display control means 305 may display a roulette image that rotates when a button operation is performed during the first valid period of the front effect, and the button is pressed during the rotation of the roulette (during the second valid period). And the rotation of the roulette becomes slow, and the subsequent post-development effects may be distributed according to the mode of the button operation input during the slow rotation. For example, if the number of button operations input during slow rotation is 0 to 1, the effect shifts to the one-shot effect, and if the number of button operations input during slow rotation is 2 or more, the effect shifts to the continuous stroke effect. If the button press state continues for a predetermined time or longer during slow rotation, the effect may be shifted to the long press effect.

The configuration for disabling the auto button function described in the modified example of the eighth embodiment can also be applied to the ninth embodiment. At least, it is preferable to automatically disable the auto button function during the period during which the developed symbol is displayed (that is, the second valid period).

<10th Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first to ninth embodiments, and the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the tenth embodiment can be any combination with the features of the prerequisite technique, the first to ninth embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected, a plurality of button effects are simultaneously executed (in other words, displayed). The plurality of button effects may have different operation modes for the effect buttons 109 that are triggers for advancing the effects. In the embodiment, at least two button effects among the plurality of button effects have different operation modes with respect to the effect button 109 that is a trigger for advancing the effect. Then, among the plurality of button effects, the operation mode input to the effect button 109 changes only the corresponding button effect. Further, in the embodiment, for the plurality of button effects, even if one button effect is completed (in other words, even if the effect after the button operation is displayed), the button operation valid period for the other button effects is continued.

Specifically, the special effect pattern is defined to simultaneously execute a plurality of special effects that prompt operation input to an input device such as an effect button 109 or a lever 112, and the plurality of special effects proceed with each effect. It may be determined that the operation mode for the effect button 109 for making the effect is different. The effect display control means 305 displays a plurality of special effects at the same time when the effect determination means 303 determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern, and the operation for the effect button 109 is input while displaying the plurality of special effects. If so, the special effect corresponding to the operation mode input to the effect button 109 among the plurality of displayed special effects can be advanced. Further, in the special effect pattern, the valid period of the operation for the effect button 109 is determined. The effect display control means 305 is configured to be capable of advancing another special effect in response to a new operation input to the effect button 109 as long as it is within the above-mentioned valid period even after the progress of one special effect. To.

In this embodiment, the entire effect displayed based on the above special effect pattern is referred to as "special effect", and a plurality of individual effects displayed simultaneously in the special effect are referred to as "button effect". FIG. 57 schematically shows a screen transition example of the special effect in the tenth embodiment. The special effect screen 720a shows the initial screen of the special effect. The effect display control means 305 displays three button effects and one button image 500 on the special effect screen 720a.

The three button effects include a one-shot effect 722, a continuous hit effect 724, and a long press effect 726. The one-shot push effect 722 is a button effect that progresses by pressing the effect button 109 once. The continuous striking effect 724 is a button effect that progresses by repeatedly striking the effect button 109. The long-press effect 726 is a button effect that progresses by long-pressing the effect button 109. It should be noted that the progress of the button effect may mean that the result of the button operation may be displayed in the screen area of the button effect corresponding to the operation mode input to the effect button 109, and a predetermined story for each button operation. It may be possible to display an animation or the like based on. In the embodiment, success (with chance up) or failure (without chance up) is displayed as a result of the button operation. The presence or absence of a big hit (winning) may be displayed.

If the effect button 109 is not pressed again within 0.5 seconds after being pressed once (strictly speaking, pressed and released), the effect determining means 303 determines that the effect button 109 is pressed once, and determines that effect. Notify the effect display control means 305. Further, if the effect button 109 is pressed once (strictly speaking, pressed and released) and then pressed again within 0.5 seconds, the effect determining means 303 determines that the effect button 109 is a continuous hit operation to that effect. Is notified to the effect display control means 305. Further, when the effect pressing state of the effect button 109 continues for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 1 second or more), the effect determining means 303 determines that the effect button 109 is a long press operation, and notifies the effect display control means 305 to that effect. ..

When the effect button 109 is pressed once while the special effect screen 720a is being displayed, the effect display control means 305 advances only the one-shot effect 722 out of the three button effects, as shown in the special effect screen 720b. .. Further, when the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit while the special effect screen 720a is being displayed, the effect display control means 305 advances only the continuous hit effect 724 out of the three button effects, as shown in the special effect screen 720c. Further, when the effect button 109 is long-pressed while the special effect screen 720a is being displayed, the effect display control means 305 advances only the long-press effect 726 out of the three button effects, as shown in the special effect screen 720d. ..

As a modification, if the effect button 109 is pressed once while the special effect screen 720a is being displayed, the effect display control means 305 may display the special effect screen 720a with the one-shot effect 722 selected. Often, for example, an image indicating "selecting" may be added on the image of the one-shot push effect 722. When the effect button 109 is pressed once more while the one-shot effect 722 is selected, the effect display control means 305 may advance the one-shot effect 722 as shown in the special effect screen 720b. good. If the progress of the one-shot effect 722 is started 0.5 seconds after the effect button 109 is pressed once, the player may feel uncomfortable. However, in this modification, the one-shot effect 722 " By sandwiching the "selecting" state, it becomes difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort. In the case of control as in the modified example, as an operation for selecting the continuous striking effect 724, the button is continuously operated for a predetermined time or longer while the special effect screen 720a is displayed (long press operation). Only the continuous striking effect 724 or the long press effect 726 can be selected. In this state, the continuous striking effect 724 is selected by releasing the effect button 109 until a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds later, etc.). If the operation is continued even at the timing of, the long press effect 726 may be selected.

Further, as a combination of button effects to be displayed at the same time in the special effect, a combination including a plurality of button effects that require the same type of button operation may be provided. For example, a combination such as "one-shot push effect (1)", "one-shot push effect (2)", and "long-press effect" may be provided. In this case, the effect display control means 305 has one-shot effect (for example, one-shot effect (for example, one-shot effect) when the first effect button 109 is pressed once, based on a predetermined order or priority of the effect. 1)) may be advanced, and when the second effect button 109 is pressed once, the other one-shot effect (for example, one-shot effect (2)) may be advanced. Alternatively, the effect display control means 305 advances one one-shot effect (for example, one-shot effect (1)) when the effect button 109 is pressed once, with respect to a second input means different from the effect button 109. At the time of one operation, the other one-shot push effect (for example, one-shot push effect (2)) may be advanced. The second input means may be a cross key 110, a lever 112 or the like that can be pulled toward you (not shown).

The button operation validity period in the special effect is the execution time of one button effect performed other than the special effect (for example, the time from the start of progress triggered by the input of the corresponding button operation to the display of the result and the end). ) Longer. In the embodiment, the button operation valid period in the special effect is set to be longer than the total execution time of the three button effects displayed simultaneously on the special effect screen. The effect display control means 305 advances another button effect in response to a new operation input to the effect button 109 as long as the button operation valid period continues even after the progress of one button effect.

According to this aspect, even if the result showing failure in one button effect is displayed, the result showing success in another button effect can be displayed. On the other hand, the result is determined by the button effect selected last (that is, the button effect other than the last does not suggest the result of the big hit lottery or the development to super reach etc., so it is not so important). If the player holds it, the interest of the special production will decline. Therefore, when the result indicating success is displayed in the first button effect completed first, the content indicating success or failure in the subsequent second button effect (for example, the content suggesting the development of the effect or the presence or absence of a big hit). Instead, display the content that suggests the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the content that suggests the reliability of the fluctuation, and the content that suggests the presence or absence of promotion after the big hit (promotion to a higher profit jackpot, etc.). You may. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the result of the big hit lottery and the production result such as the development of super reach even at the timing other than the button production executed in the special production at the end, and it becomes difficult for the player to have a feeling of the finished race. Even if success is displayed in the button effect, the player can be motivated to perform another button effect, and participation in the button effect can be further promoted.

Next, an example of the lottery process of the special effect pattern by the effect determining means 303 in this embodiment will be described. When the special effect pattern is selected as the variable effect pattern, the effect determining means 303 has three button effect operation types, each button effect effect pattern, and the success or failure of the effect (success or failure of the result) as a special effect scenario. ) Combination (production pattern of special production) is determined.

FIG. 58 shows an example of a special production scenario. In this figure, "○" indicates success and "×" indicates failure. For example, the scenario of ID0 is a scenario in which all the button effects indicate failure, so to speak, a scenario in which the disengagement is notified at the same time as the end of the special effect, and the development to a big hit, super reach, etc. is not notified. ). Further, the scenario of ID1 is a Gase scenario in which the content of the one-shot push effect is different from that of ID0, but the result is that all the button effects still show failure. In the ID5 scenario, failure is displayed when the one-shot push effect (2) is selected, but success is displayed when the one-shot push effect (1) is selected. For the ID21 scenario, success is displayed regardless of which button effect is selected. The effect determining means 303 selects one from a plurality of scenarios by lottery, but when the winning / failing determination result is a big hit, the effect determining scenario selects a scenario in which at least one button effect indicates success.

As partially described above, when the effect determining means 303 executes the button effect that results in success by the button operation of the player during the special effect, the remaining button effects (unexecuted button effects) May replace the effect content associated with the button operation with the content of the setting suggestion or the expectation level notification (reliability notification). In this case, the effect determining means 303 may select specific scenario data by lottery with reference to a table storing scenario data for replacement (the one in which the effect contents are replaced as described above). The scenario data for replacement may change the corresponding operation mode itself. For example, the unexecuted continuous hitting effect (result is a failure) may be changed to a one-shot effect (result is a setting suggestion). good. Further, the button effect of the same type may be changed to a button effect having a higher degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a button effect that results in success is executed and the scenario is replaced, the effect display control means 305 displays the mode (appearance of shape, color, etc.) of the button image 500 displayed on the screen of the special effect. , You may switch to a mode with high expectations for big hits and production development (change from white button to red button, etc.).

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select a button effect to be advanced from a plurality of button effects displayed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the entire variable effect including the button effect, and to promote the participation of the player in the button effect. Further, even if one button effect is completed, the other button effects can be advanced, so that many contents of the button effects can be presented to the player. Even if the result of the previous button effect is unsuccessful, the result of the later button effect can be successful, so that the overall interest of the special effect can be enhanced and the participation of the player in the button effect is promoted. be able to.

The first modification will be described. Here, another example of the lottery method will be described. The effect determining means 303 determines the operation type and the effect pattern of the three button effects to be displayed at the same time in the special effect. Further, the effect determining means 303 of the embodiment determines the success or failure of each of the three button effects, but the effect determining means 303 of this modification is executed during the special effect (selected by the player by operating a button). (Done) Decide how many button effects will be successful. In other words, the timing of successful button production is determined. When a specific button effect is selected by a specific button operation during the special effect, the effect display control means 305 determines the success or failure of the selected button effect according to the execution order of the button effect during the special effect. set.

For example, if the effect determining means 303 determines that the first button effect fails and the second button effect succeeds, the effect display control means 305 will use the effect display control means 305 regardless of the type of the button effect selected for the first time. The result of failure is displayed, and the result of success is displayed regardless of the type of the button effect selected for the second time. According to this aspect, since success is displayed in the button effect in a predetermined order in the special effect, the element of luck of the player for the success of the button effect can be reduced.

The second modification will be described. The effect control means 304 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a function of automatically inputting a continuous hit operation for the button effect during the period in which the long press operation for the effect button 109 is input during the button operation valid period according to the setting by the player. (Hereinafter, also referred to as "automatic continuous striking function") may be provided. Here, when the player has enabled the automatic continuous striking function and both the continuous striking effect and the long press effect are present in the unexecuted button effect in the special effect, the effect display control means 305 uses the effect button. When the long press operation for 109 is input, the long press effect may be advanced before the continuous hit effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of incongruity that the continuous striking effect proceeds even though the effect button 109 is pressed and held for a long time.

Further, when the player has enabled the automatic continuous striking function and the continuous striking effect exists in the button effect that has not been executed in the special effect but the long press effect does not exist, the effect display control means 305 uses the effect button. When the long press operation for 109 is input, the continuous hitting effect may be advanced. It should be noted that, during the special effect, the automatic continuous striking function may be automatically disabled in the first place, and an image indicating that effect may be displayed on the screen.

A third modification will be described. The effect control means 304 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with an auto button function for automatically inputting an operation for the effect button 109 during the button operation valid period according to a setting by the player. When the player has enabled the auto button function, the effect display control means 305 may advance the three button effects displayed in the special effect in a predetermined order. For example, a one-shot effect, a continuous hit effect, and a long press effect may be performed in this order. Further, of the three button effects, the button effect displayed on the upper side, the button effect displayed on the lower right side, and the button effect displayed on the lower left side may be advanced in this order.

A fourth modification will be described. When a player inputs a specific button operation (for example, a long press operation) and selects a specific button effect (for example, a long press effect), the player performs a specific button operation (for example, a long press operation) while the specific button effect is in progress. When a long press operation) is input, a special effect pattern may be provided that defines a contradiction effect that displays the result of the other button effect in the area of the other button effect (for example, the continuous hit effect). The effect determining means 303 selects a special effect pattern that defines a contradiction effect with a predetermined probability (relatively low probability) in order to suggest that the expectation of the big hit is high, the big hit is confirmed, or the setting is suggested. You may. Further, as the three button effects displayed at the same time during the special effect, a special effect pattern may be further provided in which all the same types of button effects (for example, all three are pressed once) are defined. Normally, it progresses for each button effect, but when this special effect pattern is selected, the effect display control means 305 simultaneously advances all three button effects and displays the results at the same time with one button operation. You may.

A fifth modification will be described. The special effect pattern may set a button operation valid period in which the end timings are different from each other as the button operation valid period of a plurality of button effects (for example, the one-shot effect 722, the continuous hit effect 724, and the long press effect 726 in FIG. 57). .. Further, in the special effect pattern, a button operation valid period in which the start timing and the end timing are different from each other may be defined as the button operation valid period of the plurality of button effects. Further, the special effect pattern may be set so that the execution time of the effect after receiving the corresponding button operation (also referred to as the post-operation effect) is different for each button effect displayed on the special effect screen. In this case, the special effect pattern may set different timings as the timing at which the button operation input is disabled (in other words, the end timing of the button operation valid period) in each button effect. The effect display control means 305 displays a button image and an image showing the button operation valid period in the display area of each button effect of the special effect screen 720a based on the special effect pattern, and corresponds within the button operation valid period. A plurality of button effects to which a button operation is input may be simultaneously advanced. According to this modification, it is possible to make the player judge and select "this button effect is in time" while letting the player confirm the remaining time of each button effect, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the button effect.

The sixth modification will be described. Here, application example 1 of the technical idea described in the tenth embodiment will be described. The method of making it possible to select an effect to be advanced according to the mode of button operation for a plurality of button effects displayed at the same time during the special effect can be applied to another process. For example, the effect display control means 305 may execute a button hold effect as a look-ahead effect. In the button hold effect, a hold image (an image showing hold such as a winning / failing lottery value) in the effect display device 60 is displayed in a manner imitating a button, and the hold image suggests an expectation degree according to a player's button operation. It is an effect that changes to (for example, a blue or red reserved image).

Since the button hold effect is an effect that continues over a plurality of symbol fluctuation periods, the effect display control means 305 requests the player to operate the button during the button hold effect (for example, one-shot press) display. A button effect (for example, one press) can be displayed. When the effect button 109 is pressed once (for example, when the effect button 109 is not pressed again within 0.5 seconds) with both the button hold effect and the button effect displayed, the effect display control means 305 performs the button effect. You may proceed. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is repeatedly hit (for example, when the effect button 109 is pressed again within 0.5 seconds), the effect display control means 305 may advance the button hold effect, for example, changing the appearance of the button hold. You may let me. In this case, the effect display control means 305 may display an image of the content prompting repeated hits in the vicinity of the button hold image. Further, when the button effect (here, repeated hits) is displayed while the button hold effect (here, repeated hits) is displayed, the effect display control means 305 changes the progress condition of the button hold effect to long press and holds the button. An image with content that prompts a long press may be displayed in the vicinity of the image.

A seventh modification will be described. Here, application example 2 of the technical idea described in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the situation where the button effect during the special effect of the tenth embodiment is a setting suggestion, the effect display control means 305 does not take over the operation mode up to that point, but instead, the content of the setting suggestion is based on the re-operation mode of the player. It may be configured to be displayed. For example, (1) when a long press operation is input, the set value may be directly suggested (for example, any of the set values 1 to 6 is displayed). (2) When a continuous hit operation is input, whether or not the high setting (setting value is 5 or 6) may be displayed as a high setting suggestion, or when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is actually set to a high setting. That may be displayed. (3) When a single press operation is input, it may be displayed whether or not the low setting (setting value is 1 or 2) is denied, or the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not actually the low setting (3). It may be displayed that the low setting is denied when the set value is 3 to 6). Further, in the case of the one-press operation, the content suggesting whether the set value is an even number or an odd number may be displayed. According to this modification, since the content of the setting suggestion differs depending on the button operation mode, the player can select the information he / she wants to know about the setting depending on the button operation mode.

In a situation where the button effect is a setting suggestion, the setting suggestion may not always be displayed, and the setting suggestion may be displayed with a predetermined probability. Further, as a preferred embodiment, a part of the button effect that progresses based on each operation may also serve as a setting suggestion. This example will be described below.

When a long press is input for the button effect, the effect display control means 305 may display the content indicating the reliability of the symbol variation (in other words, the expected degree of jackpot) as the content of the button effect. For example, the effect display control means 305 may display the reliability and gradually increase the reliability from "0.00%" while the state in which the button is pressed continues. A reliability of "11.11%" suggests that setting 1 is denied, "22.22%" suggests setting 2 or higher, "33.33%" suggests setting 3 or higher, and " "44.44%" may indicate a setting of 4 or higher, "45.60%" may indicate a high setting confirmation, and "66.66%" may indicate a setting of 6. At the time of suggesting the setting, the effect display control means 305 may stop and display the reliability for a predetermined time (2 seconds, etc.) at "11.11%" or the like (however, the reliability is increased in the background). In this case, since it can reach "66.66%" only during the symbol fluctuation with high reliability, the player can obtain the information regarding the high setting as the expectation of the big hit is high.

When repeated hits are input to the button effect, the content notified by the success of the button effect (for example, the reach title of the destination reach + the expected degree display) may be promoted based on the repeated hits. For example, when a reach title in white characters is normally displayed, it may be promoted to a title in red characters or a giraffe pattern (orange + yellow) title by repeated hits. Further, as for the setting suggestion, the expected degree display (for example, the number of stars) or the like may be displayed according to the set value at the time of promotion of the title display mode. For example, a change from 2 stars to 4 stars may indicate a setting of 4 or higher. The number of stars may be up to five. In this case, the five stars may be a big hit, and the expectation of the five stars may be displayed together with the reach title display of the rainbow pattern instead of the setting suggestion. In the case of setting 6, a setting 6 confirmation effect such that six star images are displayed beyond the frame may be provided.

When the button effect is pressed once, the effect display control means 305 may display a card image showing a predetermined character as a so-called lively effect. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the selection probability of the female character. Further, when a card image having a special appearance (super rare card, ultra rare card, etc.) is displayed, setting 1 may be denied regardless of the male or female character.

This application example 2 can be applied to examples other than the tenth embodiment. For example, when the effect button 109 is instructed to be pressed once in a normal button effect, an operation different from the instruction such as long press, repeated hits, operation of the cross key 110, etc. is input, so that an element like a back button is input. As a result, it may be configured to change from the normal expectation degree notice at the time of executing the one-shot push effect to the setting suggestion effect according to the operation mode. In this case, the production itself may be replaced. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may be additionally displayed after the normal expectation notice display.

<Eleventh Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first to tenth embodiments, and the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the characteristics of the eleventh embodiment can be any combination with the characteristics of the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, a button effect is displayed when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “special effect pattern”) is selected. The button effect includes a selection effect that allows the player to arbitrarily select the development destination of the scenario (contents of the effect display development of the special effect pattern). In the selection effect, the content according to the first scenario is developed by executing the selection operation of selecting the first scenario as the development destination of the scenario and the confirmation operation of confirming the selection of the first scenario. On the other hand, in the selection effect, after inputting the first scenario selection operation, it is possible to cancel the development to the first scenario and change to develop the second scenario. The second scenario is developed by not pressing the button during the button effect or by canceling after the first scenario selection operation during the button effect.

Specifically, the special effect pattern is a special effect including an operation valid period for the effect button 109, and a special effect (button effect in the embodiment) in which either the first scenario or the second scenario can be selected is provided. It is decided to carry out. The special effect is an effect that imitates a bet at a casino, the first scenario is a scenario in which, for example, the player (player side) BETs, and the second scenario is a scenario in which, for example, BET is not performed. When the effect determination means 303 determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern, the effect display control means 305 displays the special effect and selects the first scenario during the button operation valid period in the special effect. When a confirmation operation for confirming the selection of the first scenario is input, the content corresponding to the first scenario is displayed as the content of the special effect. The effect display control means 305 performs a special effect when a predetermined cancel operation is input after the input of the selection operation for selecting the first scenario or when the button operation is not performed during the button operation valid period in the special effect. As the content, the content corresponding to the second scenario is displayed.

The special effect of the embodiment includes an introductory effect that accepts whether or not to bet on the result of the effect to be a specific result (for example, to achieve a predetermined goal). Further, the special effect of the embodiment includes a post-development effect indicating whether the result of BET is success or failure, or the result of not BET is success or failure. Further, in the special effect of the embodiment, it is possible to accept a selection operation for selecting to bet, and further, it is possible to accept a BET confirmation operation or a cancel operation, which is an operation that can be input integrally with the selection operation. Specifically, the start of long-pressing the effect button 109 is accepted as a BET selection operation. Further, it is accepted as a BET confirmation operation that the long press of the effect button 109 is completed within a predetermined period. Further, it is accepted as a cancel operation that the effect button 109 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer.

FIG. 59 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the eleventh embodiment. 59 (a) to 59 (f) correspond to FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (f). This figure is an effect process defined by a special effect pattern, and shows an effect process when a player selects a BET in a special effect and determines the BET. When the special effect pattern is selected by the effect determining means 303, the effect display control means 305 executes the special effect and first starts the introduction effect of S1800 as shown in FIG. 59 (b). In the introductory effect, a button fanning effect with contents that encourage button operation is displayed (S1801). When the button fanning effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1810) to the valid state (S1811). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1830), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1820). In the button fanning effect, a message such as "Press and hold the button!" May be further displayed.

The player starts a long press operation on the effect button 109 during the button fanning effect (S1840). When an effective long press operation (for example, the pressed state of the effect button 109 continues for a predetermined time or longer) is detected, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1850). The effect display control means 305 displays a BET selection effect indicating that the BET has been selected (S1802), and then causes the player to display a cancellation effect that incites whether or not to cancel the BET (S1802). S1803). For the cancellation fanning effect, if you stop pressing and holding within the predetermined confirmation operation acceptance period (for example, within 8 seconds from the start of the cancellation fanning effect), the BET will be confirmed, and if you press and hold beyond the confirmation operation acceptance period, press and hold. If it continues, it may include the content indicating that the BET is canceled.

The effect display control means 305 is a result of a special effect (development described later here) when the effect button 109 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 2 seconds or more from the start of the cancel fan effect) after the start of the cancel fan effect. A reliability notification effect indicating the degree of expectation that the post-effect) will be successful is displayed (S1804). Here, the player stops the long press within the confirmation operation acceptance period (that is, releases the effect button 109).

When the end of the long press (that is, the input of the BET confirmation operation) is detected within the confirmation operation acceptance period, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1851). The sound effect of S1850 is a sound effect indicating BET selection, while the sound effect of S1851 is a sound effect indicating BET confirmation. The sound effect of S1850 and the sound effect of S1851 may differ in at least one of magnitude, pitch, and timbre.

Further, when the BET confirmation operation is input, the button operation is switched from the valid state to the invalid state (S1812). The effect display control means 305 ends the display of the button image 500. Further, in order to indicate that the BET has been confirmed, the button lamp is made to emit green light (S1821). Further, the BET confirmation effect of the content indicating that the BET has been confirmed is displayed (S1805).

The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the BET final effect display (S1806). The post-development production here includes the content indicating whether the result of BET is success or failure. In the case of success, the content suggesting that the expectation of the big hit has increased, the chance up notice, etc. may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of failure, the content suggesting that the expectation of the big hit has decreased or the content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low may be displayed.

FIG. 60 is also a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the special effect of the eleventh embodiment. 60 (a) to 60 (f) correspond to FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (f). This figure shows the effect process defined by the special effect pattern, and shows the effect process when the player cancels the BET after once selecting the BET in the special effect. Hereinafter, points different from the production process described in S59 will be described.

Here, the player cancels the BET by continuing to press and hold the effect button 109 until the end of the confirmation operation acceptance period. That is, in the special effect of the present embodiment, the effect determining means 303 determines that the BET has been canceled because the long press is not completed before the end of the confirmation operation acceptance period, and the effect display control means 305 and the voice control means 306. Notify the cancellation.

When the BET is canceled, the voice control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1852). The sound effect of S1852 is a sound effect indicating cancellation of BET. Therefore, the sound effect of S1852 may differ in at least one of the magnitude, height, and timbre from the sound effect of S1850 indicating BET selection and the sound effect of S1851 of FIG. 59 indicating BET confirmation.

Further, when the BET is canceled, the button operation is switched from the valid state to the invalid state (S1812). The effect display control means 305 ends the display of the button image 500. Further, in order to indicate that the BET has been canceled, the button lamp is made to emit blue light (S1822). Further, a cancellation effect indicating that the BET has been canceled is displayed (S1807).

The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the cancel effect display (S1806). The post-development production here includes content indicating whether the result of not betting is success or failure. In the case of success, the content suggesting that the expectation of the big hit has increased, the chance up notice, etc. may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of failure, the content suggesting that the expectation of the big hit has decreased or the content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low may be displayed.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment, even after the first scenario (scenario in the case of betting) is selected in the special effect, the second scenario (scenario in the case of not betting) is input by inputting a predetermined cancel operation. ), It is possible to increase the flexibility of selection of the production content. Further, since the confirmation operation and the cancel operation of the first scenario can be input as the operation integrated with the selection operation of the first scenario, the burden of the operation input of the player can be reduced. Further, by displaying the reliability notification effect after the selection operation of the first scenario and letting the player decide whether to confirm or cancel the selection, the interest of the effect can be further enhanced.

The first modification will be described. When the effect display control means 305 does not accept the button operation during the button fanning effect of S1801, the BET selection effect (S1802), the cancel fanning effect (S1803), the reliability notification effect (S1804), and the BET confirmation after the button fanning effect. The effect (S1805) and the cancel effect (S1807) may be skipped. Instead, the effect display control means 305 may display an effect indicating that the BET has not been performed. Further, when the button operation is not accepted during the button fanning effect of S1801, the button operation valid period may be terminated at the end of the button fanning effect.

The second modification will be described. A plurality of special effect patterns that can be selected by the effect determining means 303 may be provided. Of the plurality of special effect patterns, the special effect pattern in which the result of BET fails and the result of not BET also fails may be defined to display an effect indicating that the effect is out of order as a post-development effect. In addition, the above-mentioned special effect pattern displays an effect that suggests that the post-development effect is a disadvantageous development (for example, the expectation of a big hit is low) during the introduction effect (for example, cancellation fanning or reliability announcement). May be determined. In addition, the former is a big hit between the special production pattern that succeeds as a result of BET and develops into the subsequent production and the production pattern of the special production that succeeds as a result of not doing BET and develops into the subsequent production. By configuring it so that the degree is high (the selection probability in the jackpot fluctuation is higher in the former) and displaying the success pattern by BET (success pattern in one scenario), the expectation for the jackpot is higher. It may be configured to increase.

A third modification will be described. This modification can be applied to any of the eighth to eleventh embodiments. In this modification, a technical intervention element related to the operation of the effect button 109 is provided, and specifically, a variable effect pattern in which setting suggestion information may be obtained by operating the effect button 109 (here, “technical intervention effect pattern””. ) Is provided. The effect determining means 303 may select the technical intervention effect pattern with a predetermined probability. The technical intervention effect pattern may display an image instructing the player to "stop in just 5 seconds!". In this case, if the player's effect button 109 is pressed in just 5 seconds from the start, the effect display control means 305 may display the content suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 100 with high probability. good. On the other hand, when the timing of the pressing operation deviates from 5 seconds, the effect display control means 305 does not display the setting suggestion information.

It should be noted that a plurality of technical intervention effect patterns having different difficulty levels may be provided. For example, the low difficulty pattern is "Stop between 4.8 seconds and 5.2 seconds!" (0.4 seconds width), while the high difficulty pattern is "4.9 seconds". It may be "Stop in 5.1 seconds!" (Width of 0.2 seconds). In addition, the technical intervention effect pattern that can be selected may differ depending on the time zone. The effect determining means 303 may determine the current time based on the time information output from the time measuring means 307, and may select a technical intervention effect pattern corresponding to the current time. For example, in the morning, there is not much material to judge the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 100, so a medium difficulty pattern (for example, a width of 0.4 seconds) is selected, and from noon to evening, the high difficulty level is selected. A pattern (for example, a width of 0.2 seconds) may be selected, and an ultra-low difficulty pattern (for example, a width of 0.5 seconds) may be selected in order to improve the motivation to play the next day just before the store closes.

<12th Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first to eleventh embodiments, and the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the characteristics of the twelfth embodiment can be any combination with the characteristics of the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, and the modified examples.

In the twelfth embodiment, after the special symbols different from the plurality of decorative symbols 506 are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, the revariation display is performed, so that the symbol variation is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. We will explain the technology that enhances the interest of pseudo-continuous fluctuation production (also called "pseudo-continuous production"). The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment has a pseudo-continuous effect (an effect before and after the temporary stop (including a display before the temporary stop and a display immediately after the re-change)) and a pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation accompanying the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. By giving a relationship between each production to the pre-ream notice (and pseudo-rear notice) and the post-reach notice, a production element other than the number of times is added as a point to draw the player's attention in the pseudo-ream production, and the pseudo Enhancing the interest of continuous production.

Specifically, the effect determining means 303 can determine a variable effect pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “pseudo-continuous pattern”) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the effect content by lottery. When the effect display control means 305 displays a notice of the content suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream has a higher probability than the case where the notice is not displayed. Display the effect. Further, when the effect display control means 305 displays an additional image (a predetermined character image in the embodiment) different from the special symbol in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect following the pseudo-continuous effect (super reach effect in the embodiment). A notice related to the additional image and a notice indicating that the expectation of the big hit has increased (in the embodiment, a chance-up notice) is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, when an additional image different from the special symbol is displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect, the additional image has an expectation that the effect following the pseudo-continuous effect will show a big hit. It is configured to be higher than if it is not displayed. In this embodiment, as a special symbol, a "pseudo-ream symbol", which is a special symbol used at the time of temporary stop of the symbol in the pseudo-ream effect, is exemplified. However, the special symbol may be any symbol that suggests the development of the production, and is not limited to the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Hereinafter, the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. In the pseudo-ream pattern of the present embodiment, as the production process of the pseudo-ream effect, the first step of displaying a notice suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is performed before the temporary stop in the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream effect + character image is displayed. The second step of displaying and the third step of displaying the super reach effect (including the chance-up effect related to the character image) are defined.

FIG. 61 shows a display example of the first step of the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display a pseudo-continuous effect screen 800 including variations (before temporary stop) of a plurality of decorative symbols 506 and lines 802. The dialogue 802 is a dialogue notice of the content suggesting that a pseudo-continuous effect (in other words, a temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506) occurs in the present symbol variation.

Although not shown in FIG. 61 (a), the effect display control means 305 displays the button effect of the content prompting the pressing of the effect button 109 on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800 together with the dialogue 802. When the pressing of the effect button 109 is detected, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the effect display control means 305 displays a new line 804 on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800. The dialogue 804 is a dialogue notice of the content suggesting that if a specific character (referred to as “A child” in this embodiment) is displayed in the pseudo-continuous production, the expectation of a big hit will increase.

A pseudo-continuous pattern in which only the dialogue 802 is displayed and a pseudo-continuous pattern in which the dialogue 804 can be displayed in addition to the dialogue 802 are provided, and the effect determining means 303 has a predetermined probability of the former pseudo-continuous pattern or the latter pseudo-continuous pattern. You may select a continuous pattern. In this case, the dialogue notice on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800 is a notice that may proceed by pressing a button. In such a situation where multiple stages (here, two stages) of dialogue notice can be performed, when the second stage dialogue notice is executed, the symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to a somewhat long production scale (that is, the symbol fluctuation time). Is selected. Therefore, regardless of whether or not there is a suggestion regarding the pseudo-ream, if the dialogue notice continues until the second stage or later, there is a relative possibility that the pseudo-ream production will be performed compared to the case where the dialogue notice stops at the first stage. It can be said that it is expensive.

A modified example of the button effect in the first step of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. The effect display control means 305 may execute the back button effect during the line advance notice of the pseudo-continuous suggestion (line 802) and the additional image suggestion (line 804). For example, while the effect display control means 305 does not display the content prompting the button operation during the dialogue notice, when the effect button 109 is pressed during the dialogue notice, a suggestion regarding the display probability of the additional image (even in% display). Often, a definite notification may be used) may be displayed on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800. Further, such an effect process may be defined in a pseudo-continuous pattern. In addition, the effect display control means 305 may display the content prompting the button operation during the above-mentioned dialogue notice, that is, may display a normal button effect other than the back button.

Further, the button effect may be a long press effect or a continuous press effect in which a predetermined target (pressing duration or number of pressings) is set. For example, it may be a continuous striking effect that displays "press the button repeatedly to launch the fireworks!", Or if it is successful, it may display an image in which the fireworks are raised and the sparks are scattered in the form of continuation / development. .. Further, as an additional image, the character may be shown by a spark pattern. In case of failure, you may display an image in which the fireworks are not launched. In the case of such a button effect, the suggestion of pseudo-ream (for example, the display of dialogue 802) may not be performed. If the button effect is successful (in other words, if the button effect goal is achieved), the effect will be developed (the above sparks will be displayed and the pseudo-ream pattern will be stopped), so there is no need to suggest a pseudo-ream. Is. In addition, the suggestion of the additional image (for example, the display of the dialogue 804) may be performed in the production of the content that encourages the success or absence of the button production.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the second step of the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 62A, the effect display control means 305 causes the pseudo-ream effect screen 800 to display the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-ream symbol 806 (the symbol indicating “NEXT”). When the pseudo-ream symbol 806 is temporarily stopped, the effect display control means 305 displays the character 808 (here, the image of the A child suggested by the dialogue 804) at a position near the pseudo-ream symbol 806.

Although not shown in FIG. 62 (a), the effect display control means 305 displays on the pseudo-ream effect screen 800 a button effect that prompts the user to press the effect button 109 when the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-ream symbol 806 are temporarily stopped. Let me. When the effect display control means 305 detects that the effect button 109 is pressed and the result of the button operation is successful according to the pseudo-ream pattern, the effect display control means 305 re-variates the decorative pattern 506 as shown in FIG. 62 (b). Occasionally, the character 808 is displayed in a standby state in a predetermined area at the corner of the screen.

A modified example of the button effect in the second step of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. The effect display control means 305 may initially hide the character 808 when temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-continuous symbol 806. When an operation for the effect button 109 is input while the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-ream symbol 806 are temporarily stopped (while shaking, etc.), the effect display control means 305 appears a character 808 in the vicinity of the pseudo-ream symbol 806. You may let me.

Further, the effect display control means 305 may display a button effect for generating a pseudo-ream (in other words, a temporary stop) before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 or the pseudo-ream symbol 806. This button effect may include a message such as "press the button to generate a pseudo-ream" together with the button image 500. The effect display control means 305 may temporarily stop the decorative symbol 506 and the pseudo-continuous symbol 806 when the effect button 109 is pressed. When displaying the button image 500 in the button effect, the effect display control means 305 may add an additional image (character 808) to the button image 500. That is, the character 808 may be added to the button image 500 instead of the pseudo-continuous pattern 806, and for example, the character 808 may be displayed on the button image 500 or at a position near the button image 500. The additional image may be an image of a timer, or may be configured such that the timer effect described in the eighth embodiment is executed before the chance-up effect described later.

FIG. 63 shows a display example of the third step of the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the effect display control means 305 displays a plurality of decorative symbols 506 on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800 in a reach state. Further, the effect display control means 305 moves the character 808, which has been previously displayed on standby in the corner of the screen, to the center of the screen, and displays the chance-up effect using the character 808 on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800. The chance-up effect may be a cut-in effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit has increased before the display of the winning branch. A specific example of the chance-up effect is shown below.

FIG. 63 (a) shows a hold change effect as an example of a chance-up effect. The effect display control means 305 has four reserved images corresponding to the reserved first winning / failing lottery value (or the second winning / failing lottery value), and one reserved image corresponding to the lottery value of the variation (current variation). A total of five reserved images 810 are displayed on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800. The effect display control means 305 displays a hold change effect of the content in which the hold image 810 corresponding to the fluctuation changes in a mode indicating that the expectation of the big hit is relatively high due to the operation of the character 808.

FIG. 63 (b) shows a button effect as an example of a chance-up effect. The effect display control means 305 is a button effect that prompts the player to operate the button, and displays the button effect including the button image 500. The effect display control means 305 displays a button effect including a content that changes the button image 500 into a mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is relatively high due to the operation of the character 808. For example, the appearance of the button image 500 may be changed from white to red. When the effect button 109 is pressed during the button effect, the effect display control means 305 may display that the jackpot is confirmed or that the chance is further increased as a result of the button operation.

An example of the button effect in the third step of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. The effect display control means 305 may display a button effect for the purpose of promotion from the standby effect indicating the standby state of the character 808 to the chance-up effect before the display of the chance-up effect using the character 808. For example, the effect display control means 305 may change the character 808 to a mode indicating that the expectation of a big hit has increased when the effect button 109 is pressed, and may increase the number of characters 808. It may be (proliferated). Further, when promoting from the standby effect to the chance-up effect, the button image 500 may be displayed in the button effect, and the button image 500 may be changed to a high expectation mode in the same manner as in FIG. 63 (b). .. When the button image 500 is displayed in a high expectation mode from the beginning, instead of changing the mode of the button image 500, a high expectation suggestion effect by the character 808 in the standby state (line "super hot!"" Etc.) may be displayed.

Furthermore, the effect display control means 305 may execute a back button effect using a button lamp during the reach effect. For example, the effect display control means 305 does not display the content prompting the button operation on the screen during the reach effect, while the button lamp is set to blue when a predetermined button operation (repeated hit, long press, etc.) is input. By changing the color from yellow to red (ramp step-up), the player may be informed of the expectation of a big hit. The effect display control means 305 may promote the standby effect to a chance-up effect in conjunction with or at the same time as such a button lamp effect in response to repeated hits or long presses.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment suggests the occurrence of the temporary stop by the advance notice at the time of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous effect (for example, the dialogue 802 of FIG. 61 (a)) and the pseudo-continuous effect. The content of the effect (for example, the chance-up effect of FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) executed in the effect after the temporary stop of the above is also suggested during the pseudo-continuous effect (for example, the dialogue 804 of FIG. 61 (b)). Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 displays an additional image in the pseudo-continuous effect (for example, the character 808 in FIG. 62), it is a notice related to the additional image in the reach effect following the pseudo-continuous effect, and is a notice related to the additional image, and the expectation of a big hit. A notice indicating that the number has increased (for example, the chance-up effect of FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) is displayed. As a result, the relevance (in other words, a sense of unity) of the entire variable effect including the pseudo-continuous effect can be enhanced, and the jackpot expectation can be effectively suggested in the flow of the entire variable effect.

An example of a lottery method for pseudo-continuous production will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment is a first step of displaying a notice suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, a second step of displaying a pseudo-continuous effect + a character image, and a super reach effect (character image) before the temporary stop. Since the third step of displaying (including the related chance-up effect) is included, the effect content in the first stage needs to be related to the effect content in the second stage. Therefore, in this example, the production content in the latter stage is determined first.

Specifically, (1) in the pattern table held by the effect determining means 303, a specific variation pattern of a special symbol that can be determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 and a pseudo-continuous effect. Is associated with a variation effect pattern (also referred to as a sub-variation pattern) that defines. The sub-variation pattern determines the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous production and the mode of reach (presence / absence of reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.).

(2) When the effect determining means 303 selects a sub-variation pattern including elements such as "pseudo-ream + XX reach" according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the notice content in the pseudo 1 effect, the pseudo 2 The content of the notice in the production (, the content of the notice in the pseudo 3 production) and the content of the reach production (for example, character A reach, character B reach, etc.) are determined by lottery. (3) The effect determining means 303 determines a detailed pattern of the reach effect by lottery. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the reach effect, and a flag is set as to whether or not the chance-up display (that is, the additional image display) may be displayed during the pseudo-continuous effect (before the reach effect).

(4) The display mode at the time of stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol for the pseudo 2 effect + the pseudo 3 effect is determined. That is, the effect determining means 303 determines by lottery whether or not to suggest the additional image in the advance notice in the pseudo 2 effect. If the winner is elected with an additional image suggestion, the pseudo-ream pattern is changed to one with an additional image (for example, character 808). If the additional image is not suggested in the notice in the pseudo 2 effect, the same as the normal effect lottery may be used. At the time of this lottery, the effect determining means 303 switches the table for lottery depending on whether or not the flag described in (3) above is set. That is, a table that can select a notice that suggests an additional image if the chance-up display flag is set is used, and a table that cannot select a notice that suggests an additional image if the chance-up display flag is not set is used. use.

(5) The effect determining means 303 determines the content of the notice of the pseudo 1 effect by lottery. The content of the process is the same as that in (4) above. Although the chance-up display flag is set in (3), if the notice including the additional image suggestion is not selected as the notice of the pseudo 2 effect, the effect determining means 303 gives the additional image suggestion as the notice of the pseudo 1 effect. Select a notice to include.

Another example of the lottery method of the pseudo-continuous production will be described. The effect determining means 303 can select a pseudo-ream symbol stop suggestion notice (in other words, a notice suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) as a notice of the pseudo 1 effect, while a pseudo-ream symbol stop suggestion is used as a notice after the pseudo 2 effect. It may be a configuration that cannot be selected (or can be selected with a very low probability). Similarly, the effect determining means 303 can select the additional image suggestion as the advance notice of the pseudo 1 effect, but cannot select the additional image suggestion as the advance notice after the pseudo 2 effect (or can be selected with a very low probability). ) It may be configured. In addition, if it is a notice for chance up other than the additional image waiting until the chance up effect during the reach (for example, a notice of a high expectation pattern of a pseudo-continuous pattern), it is configured to be selectable with a predetermined probability. May be good. Normally, during the pseudo 2 effect, the player sees the effect with the expectation of "going to the pseudo 3 effect". Therefore, when the pseudo continuous symbol stop suggestion can be selected in the pseudo 2 effect, there is no pseudo continuous symbol stop suggestion. This is because the feeling of awakening at that time is great.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a table for determining the mode of the pseudo-continuous production. The effect determining means 303 determines a sub-variation pattern according to the results of the hit / fail determination, the symbol determination, and the pattern determination by the main board 200, and determines whether or not to execute the X notice in the route lottery based on the sub-variation pattern. do. The effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the X notice, and if the result of the hit / miss determination is incorrect, determines the notice pattern with reference to the table of FIG. 64 (a). On the other hand, when the effect determination means 303 determines the execution of the X advance notice and the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the effect determination means 303 determines the advance notice pattern with reference to the table of FIG. 64 (b). The table in this figure may be used, for example, in the lottery methods (3) to (5).

In the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), sub-variation patterns are arranged horizontally and advance notice patterns are arranged vertically. "Normal R" in the sub-variation pattern indicates normal reach (reach with relatively low expectation of big hit), and "SP" indicates super reach (reach with relatively high expectation of big hit). Further, among the notice patterns, "Pattern A" to "Pattern C" are patterns without pseudo-continuous suggestion or additional image suggestion (neither serif 802 nor serif 804 in FIG. 61). "Pattern D" and "Pattern E" are patterns that have a pseudo-ream suggestion but no additional image suggestion (only the dialogue 802 in FIG. 61). The "pattern F" is a pattern in which both the pseudo-ream suggestion before the temporary stop, the additional image suggestion, and the additional image display at the time of the temporary stop (line 802 in FIG. 61, line 804, character 808 in FIG. 62).

The values in the table are numbers (which can also be called selection probabilities), and the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) can also be said to be a table of numbers. For example, if the hit / fail determination result is incorrect (FIG. 64 (a)) and the sub-variation pattern is normal variation (no pseudo-continuous effect, no reach), pattern A is selected with a probability of 500/1000. Is shown. A value "-" in the table indicates that no place is assigned, in other words, the selection probability is 0. In addition, a small number of about 1 to 3 may be assigned to the portion indicated by "-" in FIG. 64.

When the pattern D, the pattern E, and the pattern F are selected, the pseudo-ream suggestion notice with the content suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is performed before the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed. .. Further, the pattern D, the pattern E, and the pattern F can be selected when the sub-variation pattern is "with pseudo reach", "pseudo with normal R", and "pseudo with SP". Therefore, in the table of FIG. 64, the display probability of the pseudo-ream effect when the pseudo-ream suggestion notice is displayed is 100%. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous suggestion notice is not displayed when pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C are selected. In this case, the sub-variation pattern may be any of "normal variation", "pseudo-with reach-less", "pseudo-less normal R", "pseudo-with normal R", and "pseudo-with SP", that is, pseudo-variation. The display probability of continuous production is less than 100%.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, when the pseudo-ream suggestion notice is displayed before the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, there is a higher probability than when the pseudo-ream suggestion notice is not displayed. Display a pseudo-ream effect. By displaying the pseudo-ream suggestion notice before the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream symbol, the player can pay attention not only to the number of pseudo-ream effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also to the content of the notice. It is possible to enhance the interest of the entire variable production including the production.

An additional image (character 808 in the above example) different from the pseudo-ream pattern is displayed in the pseudo-ream effect when the pattern F is selected. Further, the pattern F can be selected when the sub-variation pattern is "pseudo-existing normal R" (only at the time of big hit) and "pseudo-existing SP" (off, common to big hit). On the other hand, in all the sub-variation patterns shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, there is a possibility that a pattern other than the pattern F is selected, that is, an additional image may not be displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, when a character 808 different from the pseudo-ream pattern is displayed in the pseudo-ream effect, the effect following the pseudo-reach effect (for example, super reach effect) shows a big hit. The expectation is configured to be higher than when the character 808 is not displayed. As a result, not only the number of pseudo-continuous productions (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also the display of the additional image during the pseudo-continuous production can suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, which enhances the interest of the pseudo-continuous production. Can be done.

The first modification will be described. In the pseudo-ream effect of the above embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol (the symbol indicating "NEXT") as the decorative symbol 506 is temporarily stopped. As a modification, the pseudo-continuous effect may temporarily stop a plurality of decorative symbols 506 (ordinary decorative symbols imitating numbers) in a special combination indicating pseudo-continuous variation. In this modification, when the effect display control means 305 displays the pseudo-ream suggestion notice before the plurality of decorative symbols 506 are stopped and displayed in the above special combination, the effect display control means 305 does not display the pseudo-ream suggestion notice. Display a pseudo-ream effect with a high probability. The special combination may be, for example, "3, 3, 4" (deviation) or "1, 2, 3" (order). This modification is applicable not only to the twelfth embodiment but also to other embodiments. In that case, the above-mentioned special combination of the plurality of decorative symbols 506 may be used as the effect development image (effect development pattern).

The second modification will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern may be defined so that the content added when the symbol is temporarily stopped is related to the content of the button effect during the reach effect. Further, the additional image (here, the character 808) added when the symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo 1 effect is not displayed on standby in the corner of the screen after the pseudo 2 effect, but after the pseudo 2 effect. It may be displayed in the background. For example, the character B displayed at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo 1 effect (background is only character A) is added to the background after the pseudo 2 effect (background is character A + B), and is displayed at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo 2 effect. The created character C may be added to the background after the pseudo 3 effect (the background is character A + B + C).

In the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, the characters displayed in the background (characters A, B, C above) have a higher probability than the characters not added (for example, character D), and the effect after the reach development (cut-in notice or cut-in notice). It may be specified to be displayed on the button effect, etc.). In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern that can be selected at the time of a big hit is such that the character displayed in the background is displayed in the effect after reach development (cut-in notice, button effect, etc.) with a higher probability than the character that was not added. May be specified. Furthermore, the expectation of the jackpot is that the main character in the background (character A above)> the character added to the background during the pseudo 3 production (character C above)> the character added to the background during the pseudo 2 production. A plurality of pseudo-continuous effect patterns and selection probabilities of each pattern may be set in the order of (Character B above). The expectation of the jackpot may be reversed depending on the mode of the character. For example, even if the character B of the red aura is set to have a higher expectation of the jackpot than the character C of the blue aura. good.

A third modification will be described. In the pseudo-ream effect of the above embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol as the decorative symbol 506 was temporarily stopped. Further, in the pseudo-continuous production of the first modification, a plurality of decorative symbols 506 are stopped in a special combination. As a modification, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern may define a story-type pseudo-continuous effect (also referred to as a recollection pseudo-continuous effect). The story-type pseudo-continuous production is a pseudo-continuous production in which the contents are continuously stepped up in the pseudo 1 production, the pseudo 2 production, the pseudo 3 production, and the like. For example, it is a kind of pseudo-continuous production that progresses (continues) when each step such as pseudo 1 production and pseudo 2 production becomes successful.

In the story-type pseudo-ream effect, the player pays attention to whether or not the result of success is displayed in each step such as the pseudo 1 effect and the pseudo 2 effect. It is desirable to hide. Therefore, in the notice determination table shown in FIG. 64, the number of notice patterns placed for the story-type pseudo-ream effect may be set to be the same as in the case of no pseudo-ream (for example, "pseudo-less normal R or the like"). Further, when the sub-variation pattern for executing the story-type pseudo-continuous production is selected, it may be configured not to win the X notice.

<13th Example>
The present embodiment will be described below focusing on the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first to twelfth embodiments, and the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the characteristics of the thirteenth embodiment can be any combination with the characteristics of the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment to the twelfth embodiment, and the modified examples.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment executes a so-called quick-press effect as a button effect. Specifically, if the effect button 109 is pressed early during the quick-press effect period and the ally character is operated before the enemy character, it will be successful. On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is pressed in the introduction effect period before the quick-press effect period, it will be a mess and a failure will occur. Therefore, in the button effect in the thirteenth embodiment, the light emission of the button lamp is controlled so as to suppress the button operation of the player during the introduction effect period.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment includes a light emitting means (referred to as a “button lamp” in the embodiment) provided on the effect button 109 as an operation input means. The effect determining means 303 can determine an operation input effect (referred to as “button effect” in the embodiment) that requires the player to input an operation to the effect button 109 as the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60, in other words. For example, the button effect can be determined by lottery. The button effect is a period during which the operation input to the effect button 109 is valid (a period during which the button operation is effectively accepted, that is, a "button operation valid period"), after the first valid period and the first valid period. Includes the provided second validity period. The second valid period is a period during which the player should input the button operation as soon as possible, while the first valid period is a period during which the player should not input the button operation (a period during which the player has to handle it). The effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to emit light during the second effective period, while the button lamp does not emit light during the first effective period.

Hereinafter, the thirteenth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 65 shows a display example of the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment. 65 (a) and 65 (b) show an introduction effect in the button effect 820, and FIG. 65 (c) shows a quick press effect in the button effect 820. In the first stage of the introduction effect shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ally character 822, the enemy character 824, and the button image 500 are displayed, and if the ally character 822 can grab the donut in the center of the screen first by pressing the button quickly. A video or audio explanation of the game will be given to the effect that it will be successful.

Further, in the subsequent stage of the introduction effect shown in FIG. 65 (b), the button image 500 is temporarily hidden. In the quick-press effect shown in FIG. 65 (c), the button image 500 having a size larger than the button image 500 displayed in the previous stage of the introduction effect is displayed, and the video or audio indicating the start of the quick-press effect is output. As a modification, the button effect has a configuration in which the button image 500 is hidden in the front stage of the introduction effect, the small button image 500 fades into the screen in the rear stage of the introduction effect, and the button image 500 is enlarged in the quick press effect. There may be.

FIG. 66 is a time chart schematically showing the effect process of the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment. FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (f) correspond to FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (f). This figure shows the effect process by the variable effect pattern including the button effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “button effect pattern”), in other words, when the button effect pattern is selected by the effect determination means 303, the effect control means 304. It shows the process of button production to be executed.

When the button effect pattern is selected by the effect determination means 303, the effect display control means 305 starts the introduction effect in the button effect (S1900), as shown in FIG. 66 (b). In the introductory effect, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), a game explanation such as "press the button quickly" is displayed (S1901), and the button image 500 is displayed at the same time (S1930). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the effect display control means 305 displays a preparation instruction (which can also be said to be a standby instruction) suggesting that the quick-press effect will start soon, such as "Yoi" (S1902). .. Subsequently, the effect display control means 305 starts the quick press effect (S1903) and displays the button image 500 again (S1931), as shown in FIG. 65 (c).

The button image 500 of S1931 is displayed in a larger size than the button image 500 of S1930. Further, the button image 500 of S1930 is displayed in a mode suggesting that the button operation is not effective, such as gray display, while the button image 500 of S1931 is displayed in a mode suggesting that the button operation is effective (for example, a game). It is displayed in colors that easily attract the attention of people).

In the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment, the button valid period is from the latter stage of the introduction effect (that is, the start of S1902) to the end of the quick press effect (that is, the end of S1903). The button valid period during the introduction effect is defined as the first valid period (S1910), and the button valid period during the quick press effect is defined as the second valid period (S1911). The second valid period is a period in which the effect button 109 is required to be pressed quickly, but the button operation valid period is started before the second valid period. The button effect pattern stipulates that the button lamp is not emitted during the first effective period, while the button lamp is emitted during the second effective period. The effect display control means 305 makes the button lamp non-luminous during the first effective period, and causes the button lamp to emit white light during the second effective period (S1920).

When the effect button 109 is pressed in the second valid period (S1940), the second valid period ends, and the voice control means 306 outputs an operation sound (S1950). The plurality of types of button effect patterns that can be selected by the effect determination means 303 include a successful button effect pattern (also referred to as a success pattern) and a failure button effect pattern (also referred to as a failure pattern). The effect display control means 305 displays whether the button effect pattern is a success pattern or a failure pattern, and a result effect having contents according to the operation timing of the effect button 109 (S1904). Result production includes success production and failure production.

In the success pattern, the enemy character 824 starts to move in 1 second from the start of the quick push effect of S1903. Therefore, if the effect button 109 is pressed within 1 second after the start of the quick-press effect, the success effect is displayed. On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is pressed one second after the start of the quick-press effect, or if the effect button 109 is not pressed in the quick-press effect, the failure effect A is displayed. Successful production is a pseudo-continuous production (story type pseudo) of reach production after the production development, change of the reserved image (change to high expectation mode, etc.), content related to this notice (for example, content where enemy character 824 appears). It may be either of (continuous production). The failure effect A may display the smile of the enemy character 824 (competitive character) together with a message indicating the defeat of the ally character 822.

In the failure pattern, the enemy character 824 starts moving (taking a donut) immediately after the start of the quick push effect of S1903, so that the ally character 822 (that is, the player) is always defeated. In this case as well, the above-mentioned failure effect A is displayed. As a modification, in the failure pattern, the operation input to the effect button 109 may be invalidated in both the introduction effect and the quick-press effect (or at least the quick-press effect). Also in this modification, it is preferable that the light emitting mode of the button lamp and the display mode of the button image 500 are the same as those in the above embodiment. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the button operation is effective, and it is possible to encourage the player to operate the button even in the failure pattern.

When the effect button 109 is pressed during the button valid period (that is, the first valid period) during the introduction effect in which the button operation should not be performed, it is a so-called "hands-on". In this case, the effect display control means 305 displays the failure effect B according to the button effect pattern. The content of the failure effect B is different from that of the failure effect A, and may display the content such as "It's a trick! It's a forfeit match!". Further, in the failure effect B, the ally character 822 or the enemy character 824 may perform an operation different from that of the failure effect A.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, even if the player's operation is not actually input to the operation input device (effect button 109, etc.) by performing a predetermined operation, the player's operation can be performed. It is possible to set an automatic operation function (hereinafter, also referred to as "auto button") that advances the effect assuming that it has been input. Further, in the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment, when the automatic operation function is enabled, the state is maintained and the button effect is not automatically released. In the effect display control means 305, the operation (button operation in the embodiment) input during the first valid period of the button effect is based on the actual player operation, or the automatic operation function is effectively set. Depending on whether it is considered that there is an operation input (in other words, it is input by the automatic operation function), the production content is different. That is, in the button effect pattern, different contents are defined between the hand-made effect caused by the automatic operation function being effectively set and the hand-made effect caused by the actual player operation.

Specifically, when the auto button is enabled, when the button operation is automatically input in the first valid period, the effect display control means 305 displays the failure effect C. The content of the failure effect C is different from that of the failure effect A and the failure effect B, and may display the content such as "It is not good to cheat!". Further, in the failure effect C, the ally character 822 or the enemy character 824 may perform an operation different from that of the failure effect A and the failure effect B. Further, the failure effect C may include a content that prompts the player to release the auto button. In this way, when the auto button is enabled, it will be forcibly touched. Therefore, the effect display control means 305 may display the content recommending the release of the auto button by telop or cut-in during the introduction effect (for example, during the game explanation before the first valid period). The production process may be defined in the button production pattern.

Further, when the success pattern of the button effect is selected by the effect determining means 303, and the button operation is manually or automatically input in the first valid period, the effect display control means 305 is the failure effect B or After the failure effect C is displayed, a reverse effect may be displayed to connect to the success effect (SP reach development, etc.) without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and such an effect process is defined as at least one success pattern. May be done. The reversal effect may be, for example, a content in which a third character different from the ally character 822 and the enemy character 824 appears, and the third character wins the enemy character 824 in place of the ally character 822.

Further, when the success pattern of the button effect is selected by the effect determining means 303, and the button operation is not input in the second valid period, or the input timing is late (for example, the button operation is performed after 1 second has elapsed). (When input), the effect display control means 305 may display the above-mentioned reversal effect for connecting to a success effect (SP reach development, etc.) without causing the player to feel uncomfortable after displaying the failure effect A. Often, such a production process may be defined in at least one success pattern. In addition, the content of the success effect is a chance in both the case where the button operation is manually or automatically input in the first valid period, the case where the button operation is not input in the second valid period, or the case where the input timing is late. If the importance is relatively low, such as an up notice, a success pattern may be provided in which the reversal effect is not displayed and the success effect is cancelled.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, the light emitting means is made to emit light in the second effective period in which the operation input to the effect button 109 is requested, while the light emitting means is made to emit light in the first effective period in which the operation input to the effect button 109 should not be performed. Is non-luminous. This makes it easier for the player to prevent the player from misidentifying that the operation input to the effect button 109 is requested in the first valid period, in other words, the player can operate the effect button 109 in the button effect. Can be appropriately notified.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, the button effect when the auto button is enabled displays different contents from the button effect when the auto button is disabled. This can provide motivation to release the auto button and see other effects, prompt the release of the auto button, and participate in the other button effects (that is, button operation by the player). Can be urged. In addition, by actively participating the player in the button production, it becomes easy to foster a sense of accomplishment when acquiring a successful production.

The first modification will be described. The button effect of the thirteenth embodiment includes a quick-press effect, and is a specification that requires a quick-press operation from a certain timing (at the start of the second effective period) of a series of button operation valid periods. In the button effect in which the second valid period for giving the main change related to is provided and the first valid period arranged before the second valid period, the operation timing and the operation mode in the button operation valid period Other types of combinations are possible.

For example, for button production, it is a success condition (it can be said that it is a victory condition or an execution condition of success production) that the effect button 109 is continuously pressed and held from a certain timing during which the operation is valid, as in the case of a rocket start in a racing game. It may be something to do. In this case, if the effect button 109 is pressed too early (hands-on) or the effect button 109 is pressed late, it may be determined that the effect has failed, and the success effect may be hidden or the failure effect may be displayed.

In the button effect, the effect button 109 is released (finished) at a certain timing (second effective period) from the state in which the effect button 109 is held down during the button operation valid period (during the first effective period). In some cases, it may display a result indicating success or failure. Furthermore, the button effect is a second operation means different from the first operation means (for example, the effect button 109) used for the quick press, which triggers the transition to the quick press period (for example, the second valid period) during the button effect. It may be configured to be an operation input for (for example, a cross key 110 or a lever 112).

The second modification will be described. In the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment, the button lamp was made to emit light during the second effective period, and the button lamp was made non-light during the first effective period. As a modification, the effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to emit light in a predetermined mode (here, referred to as “effective mode”) indicating that the operation input to the effect button 109 is valid during the second effective period. In the first valid period, the button lamp may be made to emit light in a mode different from the above-mentioned predetermined mode (here, referred to as “invalid mode”).

As an effective embodiment, the button lamp may be made to emit white light as in the thirteenth embodiment, or the button lamp may be made to emit light in gold or rainbow color as an aspect that easily attracts the attention of the player. The invalid mode may be a mode that is less conspicuous than the effective mode, and may be a mode in which the button lamp emits light in gray or blue, or a light emission in an effect expression linked with another effect lamp. Similar to the thirteenth embodiment, the configuration of the second modification also makes it easier to prevent the player from misidentifying that the operation input to the effect button 109 is required in the first valid period, in other words, In the button effect, the player can be appropriately notified of the period during which the effect button 109 should be operated.

The technical idea of the thirteenth embodiment is also useful for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "slot machine") provided with an operation input device (effect button or the like) related to the effect. The normal game of the pachinko gaming machine 100 corresponds to the normal game of the slot machine, and the special game of the pachinko gaming machine 100 corresponds to the bonus game of the slot machine (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.). In the slot machine, the lottery by the lottery means results in indicating that the transition to the bonus game is possible, and the bonus game is executed when the reels stop.

The present invention has been described above based on the examples. It is understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications are possible for each of these components and combinations of processing processes, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be. For example, in the modified example, the present invention may be applied to a slot machine, a ball game machine, or another game machine.

The techniques described in Examples and Modifications may be specified by the following aspects.
[First aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect determining means determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
The special effect pattern defines an effect process that can be developed over a plurality of effect stages, and at each of the plurality of effect stages, any one of a plurality of types of operation means images, which are images showing the operation means, is displayed. The display mode pattern that determines whether or not to be performed, and the conditions of the operation mode for the operation means that must be satisfied in order to notify the development to the next effect or the effect result of the special effect pattern for each type of the operation means image are determined. Be,
When the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means causes the operation means image of the type determined by the display mode pattern to be displayed at a predetermined position in each of the plurality of effect stages. At the same time, it is determined that the corresponding portion of the operation means image to be displayed is displayed to suggest the content defined in the condition of the operation mode, and the effect stage of the special effect pattern being executed can be developed to the next effect. If the operation input of the operation means by the player satisfies the condition of the operation mode, the development to the next effect is displayed and the type of the operation means image is more expected to be a big hit. A ball game machine characterized by being able to be changed into a high variety.

The "special effect pattern" in the present embodiment may be a variable effect pattern accompanied by the establishment of a reach state in which all three symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared as the effect pattern. To. As "multiple production stages", for example, a production that can develop from the first production stage to the third production stage is defined in one variable production pattern, and the development to the next production suggests an increase in the expectation of a big hit. However, it is defined to suggest that the higher the number of stages of development, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The plurality of types of special effect patterns include a special effect pattern that is determined to be developed up to the second effect stage and a special effect pattern that is determined not to be developed after the second effect stage. However, as a modified example, after standardizing the production process that develops from the first production stage to the third production stage with a defined special production pattern, the part of the third production stage does not develop into the third production stage. May be controlled to be replaced with another effect or the part after the second effect stage may be replaced with another effect without developing into the second effect stage. The "operation means image" may be a button image on which the appearance of the operation means (for example, an effect button 109 or a button with a lever) is drawn. The button image has a different degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of display mode such as color, pattern, size, and shape. For example, a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. The "condition of the operation mode" may be determined in the form of an operation amount such as the number of operations of the effect button 109 and the continuous operation time, and the operation amount increases as the jackpot expectation is higher for each type of the operation means image. It may be determined as follows. However, the specification may be such that an exceptionally small amount of operation, for example, an opportunity to satisfy the "condition of the operation mode" with the minimum amount of operation such as "one pressing" may be given at random and infrequently. Further, as the "condition of the operation mode", the length of the valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 109 is further determined, and the length of the valid period varies depending on the amount of operation requested from the player. May be defined. The "corresponding portion of the operating means image" may be a near position where the correspondence with the operating means image can be easily grasped from the outside, and may be a nearby region adjacent to any direction around the operating means image. The "display suggesting the content defined in the condition of the operation mode" may display information suggesting at least one of the status of the operation amount and the status of the validity period, which are the conditions of the operation mode, for example. ..

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the motivation of the player to operate the buttons, and to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest by not getting bored with various operations.

[Second aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
The effect determining means can determine the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
After displaying one of a plurality of types of operation means images, which are images suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit and showing the operation means, in the special effect pattern, the operation by the player. After displaying the first special effect pattern in which the effect process for displaying a predetermined normal notice effect according to the operation of the means is defined and the first operation means image having the same mode as the operation means image, the first special effect pattern is displayed. It is determined that the first operation means image is switched to the second operation means image which is a kind suggesting a higher level of jackpot expectation than the first operation means image according to the operation of the operation means by the player. The second special production pattern and was included,
When the effect display control means is determined to execute the effect based on the first special effect pattern, the effect display control means displays an image of any type of operation means, and then responds to the operation of the operation means by the player. When the normal advance notice effect is displayed and the execution of the effect based on the second special effect pattern is determined, the first operation means image is displayed at a predetermined position, and then the operation means by the player. The first operation means image is switched to the second operation means image according to the operation of the above, and the second operation means image is made to stand by at a predetermined position on the screen and is placed in a subsequent effect, and is made to stand by. A ball game machine characterized by executing a subsequent effect using the second operating means image.

The "special effect pattern" in this embodiment may be a variable effect pattern in which two of the three symbols are aligned with the same image and one of them is aligned with the same symbol with the establishment of a reach state. Multiple types of production patterns are prepared as production patterns. The "operation means image" may be a button image on which the appearance of the operation means (for example, an effect button 109 or a button with a lever) is drawn. The button image has a different degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of display mode such as color, pattern, size, and shape. For example, a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. The "image having the same aspect as the operation means image" may be the same image as the "operation means image", or may be the same image and an image having the same aspect except for some elements. .. That is, it refers to an image having the same appearance to the extent that the player cannot tell the difference at first glance. The "subsequent effect" may be an effect that suggests that the expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the "normal notice effect". Further, the "subsequent effect" may be an effect defined in the "second special effect pattern" and executed immediately after switching the operation means image, or may be a "second special effect pattern". It may be an effect executed after the end of the effect based on the effect, or may be an effect executed after sandwiching a symbol variation effect once or a plurality of times. The "standby" of the "second operating means image" may be to move to a corner of the screen while maintaining the aspect of the "second operating means image", or the "second operating means image". You may reduce the size of "" and move it to the corner of the screen, or promote the type of "second operation means image" and display the characters "LOCK" without moving it. Or, it may be fixed (held) in place by wrapping a "chain" and displaying the characters "HOLD". The "second special effect pattern" may be defined to switch to the "second operation means image" after displaying the "normal notice effect" according to the operation of the operation means, or the operation of the operation means. Depending on the situation, it may be specified to switch to the "second operating means image" without displaying the "normal notice effect". In both the "first special effect pattern" and the "second special effect pattern", if the player does not operate the operation means, the "normal notice effect" and the switching of the operation means image are not displayed. May be controlled to.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the motivation of the player to operate the button, and to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest by giving the role of a notice to the effect of making the button image stand by.

[Third aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect determining means determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
In the special effect pattern, one of a plurality of types of operation means images, which are images suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit and showing the operation means, is displayed, and then the operation is performed by the player. When the first operation mode is performed for the means, an effect process for displaying a predetermined normal advance notice effect is defined, and even when the operation means image to be displayed is of a predetermined type, the operation means is described by the player. On the other hand, when the second operation mode different from the first operation mode is performed, the operation means image is retracted to a predetermined position on the screen and placed in a subsequent effect, and the retracted operation means image is displayed. It was decided to carry out the subsequent production that was used,
When the effect display control means is determined to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, the operation of the operation means by the player is the first operation after displaying the image of the operation means of any kind. If it is an operation mode, the normal advance notice effect is displayed, and if the operation of the operation means by the player is the second operation mode, the operation means image is retracted to a predetermined position on the screen and placed in a subsequent effect. , A ball game machine characterized by executing a subsequent effect using the retracted operation means image.

The "special effect pattern" in this embodiment may be a variable effect pattern in which two of the three symbols are aligned in the same image and one of them is aligned with the same symbol with the establishment of a reach state. Multiple types of production patterns are prepared as production patterns. The "operation means image" may be a button image on which the appearance of the operation means (for example, an effect button 109 or a button with a lever) is drawn. The button image has a different degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of display mode such as color, pattern, size, and shape. For example, a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. The "operation mode" may be a mode of an operation amount such as the number of operations of the operation means and the operation time. The "subsequent effect" may be an effect that suggests that the expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the "normal notice effect". Further, the "subsequent effect" may be an effect defined in the "second special effect pattern" and executed immediately after switching the operation means image, or may be a "second special effect pattern". It may be an effect executed after the end of the effect based on the effect, or may be an effect executed after sandwiching a symbol variation effect once or a plurality of times. The "evacuation" of the "operation means image" may be to move the "operation means image" to a corner of the screen while maintaining the mode of the "operation means image", or to reduce the size of the "operation means image" to the screen. It may be moved to the corner of the. When the player does not operate the operation means, it may be controlled so that the "normal notice effect" and the switching of the operation means image are not displayed.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the motivation of the player to operate the button, and to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest by the effect that the player can optionally stock the button image until the later effect. ..

[Fourth aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
When the predetermined special effect condition is satisfied, the effect determining means determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
The special effect pattern includes a plurality of types of images showing the operation means, which are images that can be switched to a predetermined advance notice effect image when the operation means is operated, each of which suggests a high degree of expectation of a big hit. One of the operation means images of the above is displayed, and each time a predetermined effect development condition is satisfied, the number of the displayed operation means images is increased to display a plurality of operation means images, and the plurality of operation means are displayed. Each image may include a plurality of types of operation means images suggesting a high degree of jackpot expectation and at least one of the operation means images suggesting a relatively high degree of jackpot expectation, and each is an individual preview effect image. It was decided to switch to
When the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means displays an image of any kind of operation means, and each time the effect development condition is satisfied, the displayed operation is performed. A plurality of operation means images are displayed by multiplying the number of means images, and if there is an operation of the operation means, an effect of switching the displayed one or more operation means images to individual notice effect images is executed. A bullet game machine featuring that.

The "special effect condition" may be a condition for selecting a special effect pattern as the effect pattern, and one of the conditions is that a variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the effect time of the special effect pattern is selected. It may be one of the conditions, or it may be one of the conditions to win the lottery to decide the production. The "special effect pattern" may be a variable effect pattern accompanied by the establishment of a reach state in which all three symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared as the effect pattern. The "operation means image" may be a button image on which the appearance of the operation means (for example, an effect button 109 or a button with a lever) is drawn. The button image has a different degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of display mode such as color, pattern, size, and shape. For example, a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. The initial number of operation means images displayed in the effect based on the "special effect pattern" may be one or a plurality. The "notice effect image" is an image displayed as a predetermined advance notice effect such as a comment notice, and a plurality of types of images suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit may be prepared. "Switching to the preview effect image" may be a change in the display mode such as the color, shape, and pattern of the button image, or the operation means image itself may be replaced with another type of operation means image, and further. , The displayed button image may be erased and the display of the background notice effect may be switched. The "effect development condition" may be a condition that triggers an increase in the number of operation means images, may be a condition that the player operates the operation means, or a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined entry port. It may be conditional on the establishment of an event such as the entry of a ball. "Every time it is satisfied" may be based on the premise that the "effect development condition" is satisfied a plurality of times, but may include a case where the "effect development condition" is satisfied only once. "Proliferation" may indicate that one operating means image is divided or divided into a plurality of images, or may indicate that one or a plurality of operating means images are added. A part or all of the displayed one or more operation means images is retracted to a predetermined position on the screen and placed in a subsequent effect, and the subsequent effect using the retracted operation means image is executed. You may do so. In that case, of the plurality of types of operation means images, only the type of operation means image suggesting a relatively high jackpot expectation may be saved.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the motivation of the player to operate the buttons, and to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest by the number and types of button images to be propagated.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect determining means determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
In the special effect pattern, an effect using an image showing the operation means and suggesting that a predetermined effect can be executed when an operation is performed during the valid period of the operation input of the operation means is used. In addition to displaying, an effect of displaying an operation preparation image suggesting a waiting time until the start of the valid period is defined prior to the start of the valid period of the operation input of the operating means.
When the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means displays the operation means image and executes the effect of starting the display of the operation preparation image prior to the start of the valid period. A ball game machine characterized by playing.

The "special effect pattern" in the present embodiment may be an effect pattern executed in a variable effect accompanied by the establishment of a reach state in which all three symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and there are a plurality of types of the effect patterns. A production pattern is prepared. The "operation means image" may be a button image on which the appearance of the operation means (for example, an effect button 109 or a button with a lever) is drawn. The button image has a different degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of display mode such as color, pattern, size, and shape. For example, a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. The type of the button image may be replaced in the form of being promoted to a type with a relatively high expectation of big hit in the middle of the production, or the button image may be accompanied by a predetermined character image and the character image may be used. You may execute the replacement effect of the button image. The "waiting time" may be the time required until the start of the valid period of the operation input of the operating means, or may indicate the time to a predetermined time point set before and after the start of the valid period. The time point may be the timing of a predetermined event such as the output timing of voice indicating that the valid period of the operation input of the operation means is started or the lighting timing of the lamp. Further, the "waiting time" may not be the time actually measured, but may be the apparent time displayed in the production.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the motivation of the player to operate the button, and to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest by the effect of notifying the player with a timer prior to the start of the valid period of the button operation.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
When the predetermined special effect condition is satisfied, the effect determining means determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
In the special effect pattern, a notice effect using an image showing the operation means and suggesting that a predetermined effect can be executed when an operation is performed during the valid period of the operation input of the operation means. When the operation means is operated within the valid period, the displayed operation means image is saved in the produced area provided at a predetermined position on the screen and accumulated up to a predetermined limit. It has been stipulated that the accumulated one or more operating means images can be used in subsequent productions.
When the execution of the advance notice effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means displays the advance notice effect together with the operation means image, and the operation means is operated within the valid period. In this case, the displayed operation means image is saved in the effected area and accumulated up to a predetermined limit, and when the predetermined subsequent effect condition is satisfied, any one of the accumulated operation means images. A bullet game machine characterized by displaying an effect using a sword.

The "special effect condition" may be a condition for selecting a special effect pattern as the effect pattern, and one of the conditions is that a variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the effect time of the special effect pattern is selected. It may be one of the conditions, or it may be one of the conditions to win the lottery to decide the production. The "special effect pattern" may be an effect pattern executed in a variable effect accompanied by the establishment of a reach state in which all three symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared as the effect pattern. May be done. The "operation means image" may be a button image on which the appearance of the operation means (for example, an effect button 109 or a button with a lever) is drawn. The button image has a different degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of display mode such as color, pattern, size, and shape. For example, a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. The "predetermined limit" may be the upper limit of the number of buttons that can be accumulated, or may be the end of time that can be accumulated. The "subsequent production" may be a production that suggests that the expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the "notice production". Further, the "subsequent effect" may be an effect defined in the "special effect pattern" and executed immediately after the operation means image is saved, or may be executed after the effect based on the "special effect pattern" is completed. It may be an effect to be performed, it may be an effect to be executed after sandwiching a symbol variation effect once or a plurality of times, or at least one operation means image is displayed in the effected area. Any production may be performed while you are there. The "evacuation" of the "operation means image" may be to move the "operation means image" to a corner of the screen while maintaining the mode of the "operation means image", or to reduce the size of the "operation means image" to the screen. It may be moved to the corner of the. The accumulation in the "directed area" may be up to a predetermined number, and if a new operation means image is saved when the operation means image is accumulated up to the upper limit, a plurality of accumulated operation means images are accumulated. Operation means The oldest stored image among the images may be removed, and then a new image may be added to the stored image. Although it is stated that "when the operation means is operated within the valid period", the operation means image may be stored in the produced area even when an appropriate operation is not performed within the valid period. ..

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the motivation of the player to operate the buttons, and to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest by the effect of accumulating the produced button images.

[7th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect determining means determines the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
In the special effect pattern, a notice effect using an image showing the operation means and suggesting that a predetermined effect can be executed when an operation is performed during the valid period of the operation input of the operation means. In addition to displaying, it is stipulated that an indicator for indicating the passage of the valid period in the advance notice effect is displayed on the screen in a display mode according to the high degree of expectation of a big hit.
The effect display control means displays the advance notice effect together with the operation means image when the execution of the advance notice effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, and displays an indicator for indicating the lapse of the valid period in the advance notice effect. A ball-and-ball gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on a screen and the indicator indicates a high degree of expectation of a big hit by the display mode of the lapse of the valid period.

"Elapsed valid period" may refer to the elapsed time of the valid period or may refer to the remaining time until the end of the valid period. The "indicator" may be displayed so that the value indicated by the predetermined indicator increases or decreases as an analog or continuous value as "elapsed validity period", or the value indicated by the predetermined indicator is digital or not. It may be displayed discretely so as to increase or decrease in a predetermined scale unit. The "display mode" may be the length, thickness, number, color, pattern, shape, increase / decrease direction, increase / decrease speed, increase / decrease unit, and how of these changes of a predetermined index object as an "indicator". ..

According to this aspect, the motivation of the player to operate the button is effectively enhanced, and the display mode of the valid period of the button operation is changed from the usual mode to realize a novel button effect that enhances the interest. Can be done.

[8th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
The effect determining means can determine the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
In the special effect pattern, it is defined to execute a preceding effect including an effective period of the operation for the operating means, and when an operation for the operating means is input during the valid period in the preceding effect, the expectation of a big hit is determined. It is stipulated that a predetermined element for executing the following effect shown is accumulated based on the remaining period of the valid period.
When the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means displays the preceding effect, and when an operation for the operating means is input during the valid period in the preceding effect, the valid period. A ball gaming machine characterized in that the subsequent effect corresponding to the accumulated element is displayed based on the remaining period of the above.

According to this aspect, by completing the operation for the operating means at an early stage in the preceding effect, it becomes easy to display the content with high expectation as the succeeding effect, so that the motivation of the player who operates the operating means is effectively enhanced. In other words, it is possible to effectively promote the player's participation in the production by operating the operating means. Further, since the degree of chance increase in the subsequent production can be changed depending on the participation status of the player in the preceding production (operation status for the operating means), it is possible to improve the degree of expectation in the variable production.

[9th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
The effect determining means can determine the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
The special effect pattern is a preceding effect including a valid period of the operation for the operating means, and when an operation for the operating means is input during the valid period, a special image suggesting the development of the effect is displayed. It is stipulated that the preceding effect is executed, and that the content of the succeeding effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is different depending on the operation mode input to the operation means during the display period of the special image.
The effect display control means displays the preceding effect when the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, and the special image when an operation for the operating means is input during the valid period in the preceding effect. Is displayed, and the subsequent effect having different contents is displayed according to the operation mode input to the operation means during the display period of the special image.

According to this aspect, when the development of the effect is suggested by the operation on the operation means, the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode after the development by the operation mode for the operation means in the suggestion. As a result, the content of the variable effect can be adjusted according to the taste of the player, so that the overall interest of the variable effect can be enhanced.

[Aspect 10-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
The effect determining means can determine the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
The special effect pattern is defined to simultaneously execute a plurality of special effects for prompting an operation input to the operation means, and the plurality of special effects have an operation mode for the operation means for advancing each effect. Have different cases,
When the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means simultaneously displays the plurality of special effects, and an operation for the operation means is input while the plurality of special effects are being displayed. In the case, a ball gaming machine characterized in that a special effect corresponding to an operation mode input to the operation means can be advanced among a plurality of special effects being displayed.

According to this aspect, the player can arbitrarily select a special effect to be advanced from a plurality of special effects displayed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the entire variable effect including the operation input for the operation means.

[Aspect 10-2]
In the 10-1 aspect, the special effect pattern may have a valid period of operation for the operating means. The effect display control means can advance another special effect in response to a new operation input to the operation means as long as it is within the valid period even after the progress of one special effect. May be good.

According to this aspect, since it is possible to proceed with another special effect even after the end of one special effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the entire variable effect including the operation input to the operation means.

[11th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and a production display device
An effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device, and
Equipped with an operation means that accepts operation input by the player,
The effect determining means can determine the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern as the effect content.
The special effect pattern is defined to execute a special effect including a valid period of operation for the operation means, in which one of the first scenario and the second scenario can be selected.
When the execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, the effect display control means displays the special effect, selects the first scenario during the valid period in the special effect, and the first. When a confirmation operation for confirming the selection of the scenario is input, the content corresponding to the first scenario is displayed as the content of the special effect, and a predetermined cancel operation is performed after inputting the selection operation for selecting the first scenario. When input, the ball gaming machine is characterized in that the content corresponding to the second scenario is displayed as the content of the special effect.

According to this aspect, even after the first scenario is once selected, the flexibility of selection of the effect content can be enhanced by shifting to the second scenario by inputting a predetermined cancel operation.

[Aspect 12-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
An effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail determination are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect display device.
An effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern,
The effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device is provided.
In the effect determining means, as the effect content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, the revariation display is performed, so that the symbol variation is simulated a plurality of times. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect that looks like this is displayed.
When the effect display control means displays a notice of content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect display control means does not display the notice. A ball gaming machine characterized in that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect is displayed with a high probability.

According to this aspect, by displaying a notice of the content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, not only the number of pseudo continuous variation effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also the number of temporary stops. The content of the notice can also be noticed by the player, and the overall interest of the variable effect including the pseudo continuous variable effect can be enhanced.

[12-2 aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
An effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail determination are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect display device.
An effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern,
The effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device is provided.
The effect determining means has, as the content of the effect, a temporary stop display of a special symbol different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, and then a re-variation display is performed, so that the symbol is simulated a plurality of times. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern that displays a pseudo-continuous variation effect that makes the variation appear to have been executed.
When the effect display control means displays a notice of content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is higher than the case where the notice is not displayed. A ball-and-ball game machine characterized in that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect is displayed with a probability.

According to this aspect, by displaying a notice of the content suggesting that the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is performed before the temporary stop of the special symbol, not only the number of pseudo continuous variation effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also the number of temporary stops is displayed. The content of the notice can also be noticed by the player, and the overall interest of the variable effect including the pseudo continuous variable effect can be enhanced.

[Ath 13-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
An effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail determination are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect display device.
An effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern,
The effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device is provided.
In the effect determining means, as the effect content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, the revariation display is performed, so that the symbol variation is simulated a plurality of times. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect that looks like this is displayed.
When the effect display control means displays a notice of content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect display control means does not display the notice. With a high probability, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect is displayed.
When the effect display control means displays an additional image different from the plurality of decorative symbols in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the effect display control means is a notice related to the additional image in the effect following the pseudo continuous variation effect, and is a big hit. A ball game machine characterized by displaying a notice indicating that the expectation of the game has increased.

According to this aspect, the occurrence of the temporary stop is suggested by the advance notice at the time of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect, and the effect content executed in the effect after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous change effect is also being produced in the pseudo continuous change effect. Make a suggestion. As a result, the relevance (in other words, a sense of unity) of the entire variation effect including the pseudo continuous variation effect is enhanced, so that the jackpot expectation can be effectively suggested in the flow of the entire variation effect.

[Ath 13-2 aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
An effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail determination are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect display device.
An effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern,
The effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device is provided.
The effect determining means has, as the content of the effect, a temporary stop display of a special symbol different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, and then a re-variation display is performed, so that the symbol is simulated a plurality of times. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern that displays a pseudo-continuous variation effect that makes the variation appear to have been executed.
When the effect display control means displays a notice of content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is higher than the case where the notice is not displayed. Display the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with probability,
When the effect display control means displays an additional image different from the special symbol in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the effect display control means is a notice related to the additional image in the effect following the pseudo continuous variation effect, and is expected to be a big hit. A ball game machine characterized by displaying a notice indicating that the degree has increased.

According to this aspect, the occurrence of the temporary stop is suggested by the advance notice at the time of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect, and the effect content executed in the effect after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous change effect is also being produced in the pseudo continuous change effect. Make a suggestion. As a result, the relevance (in other words, a sense of unity) of the entire variation effect including the pseudo continuous variation effect is enhanced, so that the jackpot expectation can be effectively suggested in the flow of the entire variation effect.

[Aspect 14-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
An effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail determination are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect display device.
An effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern,
The effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device is provided.
In the effect determining means, as the effect content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, the revariation display is performed, so that the symbol variation is simulated a plurality of times. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect that looks like this is displayed.
When the effect display control means displays a notice of content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect display control means does not display the notice. Also has a high probability of displaying the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect,
When an additional image different from the plurality of decorative symbols is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the expectation that the effect following the pseudo continuous variation effect shows a big hit is higher than when the additional image is not displayed. A ball game machine featuring that.

According to this aspect, the expectation of a big hit can be suggested not only by the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also by the display of the additional image during the pseudo continuous variation effect. Can enhance the interest of.

[Aspect 14-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting winning opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination is variablely displayed, and a symbol display device.
A symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the hit / fail determination, and a symbol determining means.
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns for which a symbol variation display process is defined by lottery, and
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
An effect display device in which a plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail determination are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect display device.
An effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variation display of the plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern,
The effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device is provided.
The effect determining means has, as the content of the effect, a temporary stop display of a special symbol different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, and then a re-variation display is performed, so that the symbol is simulated a plurality of times. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern that displays a pseudo-continuous variation effect that makes the variation appear to have been executed.
When the effect display control means displays a notice of content suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is higher than the case where the notice is not displayed. Display the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with probability,
When an additional image different from the special symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the expectation that the effect following the pseudo continuous variation effect shows a big hit is higher than when the additional image is not displayed. A featured ball game machine.

According to this aspect, the expectation of a big hit can be suggested not only by the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also by the display of the additional image during the pseudo continuous variation effect. Can enhance the interest of.

[15-1 aspect]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition from a normal game to a special game advantageous to the player is possible, triggered by a predetermined game operation.
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the special game can be transferred to the special game.
A production decision method that determines the production content,
An operation input device that accepts operation input by the player,
The light emitting means provided in the operation input device and
Equipped with
As the effect content, the effect determining means can determine an operation input effect that requires the player to input an operation to the operation input device.
The operation input effect includes a first period and a second period provided after the first period as a period for validating the operation input to the operation input device.
A gaming machine that causes the light emitting means to emit light in the second period and makes the light emitting means non-light emitting in the first period.

According to this aspect, the light emitting means is made to emit light in the second period when the operation input to the operating means is requested, while the light emitting means is made non-lighting in the first period when the operation input to the operating means is not required. This makes it easier for the player to prevent the player from misidentifying that the operation input to the operation means is requested in the first period, in other words, the player is allowed to operate the operation means in the operation input effect. It can be notified appropriately.

[15-2 aspect]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition from a normal game to a special game advantageous to the player is possible, triggered by a predetermined game operation.
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the special game can be transferred to the special game.
A production decision method that determines the production content,
An operation input device that accepts operation input by the player,
The light emitting means provided in the operation input device and
Equipped with
As the effect content, the effect determining means can determine an operation input effect that requires the player to input an operation to the operation input device.
The operation input effect includes a first period and a second period provided after the first period as a period for validating the operation input to the operation input device.
In the second period, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a predetermined mode indicating that the operation input to the operation input device is effective, and in the first period, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a mode different from the predetermined mode. A game machine that emits light.

According to this aspect, in the second period in which the operation input to the operation means is requested, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a predetermined mode indicating that the operation input to the operation input device is effective, while the operation input to the operation means is made to emit light. In the first period, which does not require the above, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a mode different from the above-mentioned predetermined mode. This makes it easier for the player to prevent the player from misidentifying that the operation input to the operation means is required in the first period, in other words, the player is allowed to operate the operation means in the operation input effect. It can be notified appropriately.

11 1st start port, 12 2nd start port, 60 effect display device, 80 game board, 221 1st hit / fail determination means, 222 2nd hit / fail determination means, 260 special game control means, 303 effect determination means, 305 effect display control Means, 500 button image.

Claims (1)

A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition from a normal game to a special game advantageous to the player is possible, triggered by a predetermined game operation .
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the special game can be transferred to the special game.
A production decision method that determines the production content,
An effect display device that displays an image constituting the effect content determined by the effect determination means, and an effect display device.
An operation input device that accepts operation input by the player,
The light emitting means provided in the operation input device and
Equipped with
As the effect content, the effect determining means can determine an operation input effect that requires the player to input an operation to the operation input device.
The operation input effect includes a first period and a second period provided after the first period as a period for validating the operation input to the operation input device.
In the second period, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a specific mode, and in the first period, the light emitting means is not made to emit light in the specific mode.
In the operation input effect, the result of the operation input effect is notified in response to the operation input to the operation input device in either the first period or the second period.
The effect determining means can determine a success pattern suggesting a result advantageous to the player and a failure pattern suggesting a result unfavorable to the player as the execution mode of the operation input effect.
The image display mode on the effect display device before the input operation to the operation input device may differ depending on whether the operation input effect is executed in the success pattern or the failure pattern. A bullet game machine featuring that.

Images